Trailing-Edge
-
PDP-10 Archives
-
tops10v704_docc
-
10,7/docupd/oclrm.mem
There is 1 other file named oclrm.mem in the archive. Click here to see a list.
TOPS-10
Operator's Command
Language Reference Manual
| Electronically Distributed
|
|
|
| This manual describes the commands an operator
| needs. These include commands to the OPR program,
| the OPSER program, and the monitor commands that
| require operator privileges. It also includes the
| following OPR command subsets: CATALOG, CONFIG,
| LCP, NCP, QUOTA.
|
| This manual supercedes the TOPS-10 Operator's
| Command Language Reference Manual published in
| October, 1988. The order number for that manual,
| AA-H599C-TB, is obsolete.
Operating System: TOPS-10 Version 7.04
Software: GALAXY Version 5.1
digital equipment corporation marlborough, massachusetts
| TOPS-10 Update Tape No. 03, September 1990
First Printing, July 1982
Revised, April 1986
Revised, October 1988
The information in this document is subject to change without notice
and should not be construed as a commitment by Digital Equipment
Corporation. Digital Equipment Corporation assumes no responsibility
for any errors that may appear in this document.
The software described in this document is furnished under a
license and may be used or copied in accordance with the terms of such
license.
No responsibility is assumed for the use or reliability of software or
equipment that is not supplied by Digital Equipment Corporation or its
affiliated companies.
| Copyright C 1982, 1986, 1988, 1990 Digital Equipment Corporation.
All Rights Reserved.
The following are trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation:
CI DECtape LA50 SITGO-10
DDCMP DECUS LN01 TOPS-10
DEC DECwriter LN03 TOPS-20
DECmail DELNI MASSBUS TOPS-20AN
DECnet DELUA PDP UNIBUS
DECnet-VAX HSC PDP-11/24 UETP
DECserver HSC-50 PrintServer VAX
DECserver 100 KA10 PrintServer 40 VAX/VMS
DECserver 200 KI Q-bus VT50
DECsystem-10 KL10 ReGIS
DECSYSTEM-20 KS10 RSX d i g i t a l
CONTENTS
PREFACE
CHAPTER 1 THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR
1.1 INTRODUCTION TO OPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-i
1.2 RUNNING OPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.2.1 Starting OPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.2.2 Exiting from OPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.2.3 Issuing OPR Commands to/from Remote Stations . . 1-3
1.2.4 Multiple Operators on the System . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.3 OPR COMMAND FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.3.1 Listing Available Commands . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.3.2 Using ESCape Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1.3.3 Reprinting Faulty Commands . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.3.4 Getting Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.3.5 Line Continuation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.4 CONTROLLING SYSTEM EVENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.5 CONTROLLING FAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1.6 CONTROLLING NQC STREAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1.7 ORION TO OPR MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1.7.1 Controlling OPR Message Output . . . . . . . . 1-12
1.8 OPR ERROR MESSAGE DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . 1-13
CHAPTER 2 OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
2.1 ABORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.2 ALIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.3 BACKSPACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2.4 CANCEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.5 CLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
2.6 CONTINUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
2.7 DEFINE FILE-ACCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
2.8 DEFINE NETWORK-QUEUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
2.9 DEFINE NODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
2.10 DISABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
2.11 DISMOUNT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
2.12 ENABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
2.13 ENTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
2.14 EXIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
2.15 FORWARDSPACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
2.16 HELP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
2.17 HOLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
2.18 IDENTIFY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
2.19 LOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
2.20 MODIFY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
iii
2.21 MOUNT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
2.22 NEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
2.23 PUSH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
2.24 RECOGNIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
2.25 RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
2.26 REPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69
2.27 REQUEUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71
2.28 RESPOND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
2.29 RESTRICT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76
2.30 ROUTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
2.31 SEND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81
2.32 SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-83
2.33 SET BATCH-STREAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-84
2.34 SET CARD-PUNCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-88
2.35 SET FAL-STREAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-91
2.36 SET JOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-92
2.37 SET KSYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-94
2.38 SET NODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-97
2.39 SET NQC-STREAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-99
2.40 SET PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-100
2.41 SET PLOTTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-103
2.42 SET PRINTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-106
2.43 SET SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-111
2.44 SET TAPE-DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-114
2.45 SET TERMINAL TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-120
2.46 SET USAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-122
2.47 SHOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-125
2.48 SHOW ALLOCATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-126
2.49 SHOW CONTROL-FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-128
2.50 SHOW MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-130
2.51 SHOW NETWORK-QUEUE-NAMES . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-132
2.52 SHOW OPERATORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-133
2.53 SHOW PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-135
2.54 SHOW QUEUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-138
2.55 SHOW ROUTE-TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-142
2.56 SHOW STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-143
2.57 SHOW SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-148
2.58 SHOW TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-150
2.59 SHUTDOWN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-151
2.60 START . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-154
2.61 STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-157
2.62 SUPPRESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-161
2.63 TAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-163
2.64 UNLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-167
2.65 UNRESTRICT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-169
2.66 WAIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-170
CHAPTER 3 OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
3.1 ENTERING AND EXITING OPR COMMAND SUBSETS . . . . . 3-1
iv
3.2 TOP-LEVEL COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.3 CATALOG COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.4 CONFIG COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
3.5 LCP COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
3.6 NCP COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
3.7 QUOTA COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61
CHAPTER 4 TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS
4.1 ATTACH CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.2 ATTACH DEVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.3 ATTACH DISK-UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4.4 ATTACH JOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.5 DETACH DEVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4.6 DETACH DISK-UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4.7 INITIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4.8 SEND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4.9 SET BREAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
4.10 SET CORMAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
4.11 SET CORMIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
4.12 SET CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
4.13 SET DATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
4.14 SET DAYTIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
4.15 SET MEMORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
4.16 SET NOMESSAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
4.17 SET OPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
4.18 SET SCHED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
4.19 SET TTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
4.20 SET VMMAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
4.21 XCHNGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
CHAPTER 5 OPSER COMMAND LANGUAGE
5.1 INTRODUCTION TO OPSER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.2 STARTING OPSER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.2.1 Commands to the OPSER Program . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.2.2 Commands Directly to Subjobs . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.3 OPSER COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.3.1 OPSER Commands for the Operator . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.3.2 OPSER Commands for All Users . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5.4 OPSER OPERATOR MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
APPENDIX A OPR ERROR MESSAGES
INDEX
v
TABLES
3-1 NCP Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
4-1 Number of Fillers by Character and Filler Class 4-32
PREFACE
The TOPS-10 Operator's Command Language Reference Manual describes the
following command groups:
o Operator command language commands (OPR)
o Disk and tape cataloging commands (CATALOG)
o System device configuration commands (CONFIG)
o LAT control program commands (LCP)
o DECnet network control program commands (NCP)
o Disk space quota commands (QUOTA)
o Operator privileged monitor commands
o OPSER program commands
Chapter 1 provides an introduction to OPR, the operator command
language. Each of the following chapters covers one of the above
command groups. For easy reference, the commands in each chapter are
arranged in alphabetical order.
This manual is for the beginning operator as well as the experienced
operator. It assumes that the reader has SYSTEM, HOST, or REMOTE
operator privileges and knows how to log in as an operator.
This manual assumes that you, the operator, have read all or parts of
the following manuals:
Getting Started with TOPS-10
TOPS-10 Operator's Guide
vii
TOPS-10/TOPS-20 Operator's Hardware Device and Maintenance Guide
In addition, you may need to read the following manuals to obtain
additional information related to the tasks you must perform:
TOPS-10 Software Installation Guide
TOPS-10 User Utilities Manual
TOPS-10 Operating System Commands Manual
TOPS-10 DECnet and PSI System Manager's and Operator's Guide
Local Area Transport (LAT) Architecture Network Manager's Guide
TOPS-10 IBM Emulation/Termination Manual
Conventions Used in this Manual
Symbol Meaning
OPR>HELP What you type is underscored.
<RET> Press the key labeled RETURN or CR.
<ESC> Press the key labeled ESC, ESCape, ALT, or PRE.
<CTRL/x> Press the CTRL and x keys simultaneously.
hh:mm:ss Specifies a time in twenty-four hour clock format,
where hh is hours, mm is minutes, and ss is seconds.
For example, 15:00:00 is 1:00 p.m., and 15:15:00 is
1:15 p.m.
dd-mmm-yy Specifies a date, where dd is the day, mmm is the
month, and yy is the year. For example, 15-Sep-88
is September 15, 1988.
NOTE
Commands that specify a node-name as a keyword or
argument no longer require that you include double
colons after the node name.
viii
CHAPTER 1
THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR
1.1 INTRODUCTION TO OPR
The Operator Command Language (OPR) enables you to communicate with
the programs that make up the GALAXY batch and spooling system. These
programs are:
o QUASAR, the nucleus of the GALAXY and mountable device
allocation systems
o BATCON, the batch job controller
o CATALOG, the system catalog manager
o LPTSPL, the line printer spooler
o CDRIVE, the card reader spooler
o SPRINT, the reader interpreter
o SPROUT, the card punch, paper tape punch, and plotter spooler
o PULSAR, the label processor for tapes and structures
o NEBULA, the output job router between DECnet nodes
o QUEUE, the user interface to submit print and batch jobs
In addition, you use OPR to communicate with programs requesting
operator action, such as the PLEASE program, or with users on the
system.
The program that receives the OPR commands and communicates with all
the other system programs is ORION. ORION also logs messages in the
operator's log file, OPERAT.LOG.
1-1
THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR
RUNNING OPR
1.2 RUNNING OPR
To run OPR, you must have one of the following privileges. (See your
system manager to obtain one of these privileges if you do not already
have them.)
1. SYSTEM operator privileges, which enable you to control
devices and tasks on the host system and on any remote nodes.
2. HOST operator privileges, which enable you to control devices
and tasks at your local host system only.
3. REMOTE operator privileges, which enable you to control
devices and tasks at the remote station node where you are
located.
The tasks in this chapter and in following chapters assume that you
have more than one terminal available to perform them. If you have
more than one terminal available to you, you may want to dedicate one
terminal to running only OPR, and use another terminal for other
tasks, for example, running BACKUP.
The following sections explain how to start and exit from OPR.
1.2.1 Starting OPR
To start OPR type the following:
.R OPR<RET>
OPR>
If your installation has more than one terminal assigned to its
operators, you can run separate OPRs from different terminals. All
OPRs work the same way. ORION, OPR's controlling program, can handle
an unlimited number of OPRs.
1.2.2 Exiting from OPR
To exit from OPR, press <CTRL/Z> or type EXIT. OPR returns your job
to monitor command level. The period prompt (.) indicates that you
are at monitor command level. For example:
OPR>EXIT<RET>
.
1-2
THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR
RUNNING OPR
1.2.3 Issuing OPR Commands to/from Remote Stations
The system operator at the host system has control of all jobs and
devices at all nodes within the network system. If you are a Remote
Station Operator, you can control only the devices at your remote
station. In addition, you have complete control over all active jobs
and jobs queued for devices at your node. All your commands default
to your location or node. Some OPR commands, however, include the
/NODE switch which enables you to send commands to other nodes in the
network. The /NODE switch is available with many of the OPR commands
described in later sections of this manual. The /NODE switch allows
you to specify the logical identifier of any remote station or any
node in the network system. The format of the /NODE switch is:
/NODE:node-id
where node-id is the number or the name of the remote station.
1.2.4 Multiple Operators on the System
You can have more than one OPR running on the same operating system.
ORION keeps track of each OPR and sends the appropriate
acknowledgement messages to the OPR who sent the command.
If you have networking software at your installation, messages sent to
a node from a user (with the SEND OPR monitor command) are sent to all
OPRs running on the node.
You can enable or disable messages displayed at each terminal running
OPR. See Section 1.7.1 for information on controlling OPR message
output.
1.3 OPR COMMAND FEATURES
OPR has features that enable you to:
o List available commands
o Use ESCape recognition
o Obtain help text
o Reprint faulty commands
o Continue long command lines
The following sections describe these command features in detail.
1-3
THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR
OPR COMMAND FEATURES
In addition, other CTRL/character commands, such as CTRL/R, CTRL/U,
and CTRL/W, function at OPR command level as they do at monitor
command level.
NOTE
These OPR command features are not applicable when OPR
is a subjob of OPSER.
1.3.1 Listing Available Commands
To list all available OPR commands, type a question mark (?) to the
OPR> prompt. You can type ? whenever you need help with an OPR
command. For example:
o When you type ? while entering a command, OPR lists command
keywords, arguments, or switches for the OPR command and then
redisplays your OPR command up to the point where you typed
the ?.
o When you type ? after the OPR> prompt, OPR lists the
available commands.
o When you type ? after an OPR command, OPR lists the keywords
to that command and redisplays the command.
o When you type ? after the keyword, OPR lists the values,
arguments, and/or switches to that keyword and redisplays the
command and keywords up to the point where you typed ?.
o When you type ? after an entire OPR command, OPR displays
the message "Confirm with carriage return", redisplays your
entire command, and waits for you to press the RETURN key.
Example
After you have started OPR and the system displays the OPR> prompt,
type ?.
.R OPR <RET>
OPR>? one of the following:
ABORT ALIGN BACKSPACE CANCEL CLOSE
CONTINUE DEFINE DISABLE DISMOUNT ENABLE
ENTER EXIT FORWARDSPACE HELP HOLD
IDENTIFY LOCK MODIFY MOUNT NEXT
PUSH RECOGNIZE RELEASE REPORT REQUEUE
RESPOND RESTRICT ROUTE SEND SET
SHOW SHUTDOWN START STOP SUPPRESS
1-4
THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR
OPR COMMAND FEATURES
TAKE UNLOCK UNRESTRICT WAIT
or one of the following:
CATALOG CONFIG LCP NCP QUOTA
OPR>
NOTE
The NCP command applies only if your installation uses
DECnet software. See the TOPS-10 DECnet and PSI
System Manager's and Operator's Guide for more
information about NCP.
The LCP command applies only if your installation uses
LAT software. See the LAT Terminal Server Network
Manager's Guide for more information about LCP.
1.3.2 Using ESCape Recognition
ESCape recognition helps you to enter commands by:
o Completing command keywords and switches to the point that
they become unambiguous with other keywords and switches
o Allowing you to type shortened versions of commands
o Providing guide words that prompt you for more information
You can press the ESCape key as soon as you have typed enough
characters to uniquely identify a command to OPR. The number of
characters necessary for OPR to accept the command varies and requires
some experimentation on your part.
NOTE
The terminal bell rings when you press the ESCape key
if you have not typed enough characters to uniquely
identify a command. If this happens, type another
character and press the ESCape key. Continue to do
this until the characters you have typed identify a
specific command.
The following keyword table and dialog illustrate the ESCape command
completion feature:
DEVICE-A-TABLE-OFF
DEVICE-A-TABLE-ON
1-5
THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR
OPR COMMAND FEATURES
DEVICE-B-TABLE-OFF
DEVICE-B-TABLE-ON
1. Type D<ESC>.
OPR>D<ESC>EVICE-
OPR responds by providing "EVICE-" and then beeps.
2. Type A<ESC>.
OPR>D<ESC>EVICE-A<ESC>-TABLE-O
OPR responds by providing "-TABLE-O" and then beeps.
3. Type F<ESC>.
OPR>D<ESC>EVICE-A<ESC>-TABLE-OF<ESC>F
OPR responds by providing "F" and completes the keyword,
"DEVICE-A-TABLE-OFF".
The following example illustrates the ESCape recognition feature:
1. Type the ABORT command.
2. Press the ESCape key to display the ABORT guide words. (The
characters <ESC> are not echoed on your terminal.)
Example
OPR>ABORT<ESC>(current job on)BATCH-STREAM<ESC>(stream number) 0<RET>
10:37:21 Batch-Stream 0 -- Abort request queued --
OPR>
10:37:42 Batch-Stream 0 -- End --
Job TBUILD Req 145 for HURLEY [33,2623]
OPR>
1.3.3 Reprinting Faulty Commands
When you issue a correct command to OPR, OPR passes the command to
ORION. If the command is incorrect, OPR displays an error message.
If you receive an error message, you can retype the entire OPR
command, or press <CTRL/H> to reprint the command up to the point
where the error occurred.
1-6
THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR
OPR COMMAND FEATURES
To use the <CTRL/H> feature do the following:
1. Press <CTRL/H> to redisplay the command up to the point where
the error occured. (The characters <CTRL/H> and <ESC> are
not echoed on your terminal.)
2. Enter the correct information.
Example
OPR>FORWARDSPACE PRINTER<ESC>(unit number) 0 /PAGES:3) <RET>
? Not confirmed: "3"
OPR><CTRL/H>FORWARDSPACE PRINTER 0 (unit number) /PAGES:30 <RET>
OPR>
13:25:04 Printer 0 -- Forwardspaced 30 Pages --
OPR>
1.3.4 Getting Help
The OPR HELP command provides information about specific commands.
When you type HELP, followed by an OPR command name, OPR displays the
command's function and its format, keywords, arguments, and switches.
The following example illustrates the HELP feature:
If you specify HELP RELEASE, OPR displays the function, format,
keywords, and arguments of the RELEASE command.
OPR>HELP<ESC>(with) RELEASE <RET>
The RELEASE command allows you to release a job request that was held
with the HOLD command. The format is:
RELEASE keyword
where keyword must be one of the following:
BATCH-JOBS
CARD-PUNCH-JOBS
PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH-JOBS
PLOTTER-JOBS
PRINTER-JOBS
1-7
THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR
OPR COMMAND FEATURES
followed by one of these arguments:
<request-id-number> (for a single job)
[user name] (for all jobs of a user)
* (for all job requests)
OPR>
1.3.5 Line Continuation
Commands to OPR are often long and cumbersome, especially if you use
ESCape recognition. The OPR program enables you to continue a command
on the next line. To continue a command line, type a hyphen (-)
before you press <RET>. This prevents OPR from processing the line
until it reaches a <RET> that is not preceded by a hyphen. (You must
include the entire command name, keyword, argument, or switch and
value before you type the hyphen.)
For example, the following command line uses line continuation:
OPR>SET TAPE-DRIVE MTA3: INITIALIZE /LABEL-TYPE:ANSI- <RET>
/OWNER:[31,5723]/TAPE-DISPOSITION:HOLD/VOLUME-ID:TAPE01 <RET>
OPR>
1.4 CONTROLLING SYSTEM EVENTS
OPR enables you to control certain system activities known as
"events". These events are:
o Billing file closure (BILCLS)
o Scheduled system shutdown (KSYS)
o ORION log file closure (OPRFIL)
o Command file execution (TAKFIL)
o Usage file closure (USGFIL)
You can use the following commands to control system events:
o CLOSE
o SET KSYS
1-8
THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR
CONTROLLING SYSTEM EVENTS
o SET USAGE
o TAKE
To specify a time, day, or date argument with any of the above
commands, use one of the following formats:
NOW causes the event to occur immediately.
+hh:mm:ss schedules the event to occur in the number of
hours from the current time, as specified by
hh:mm:ss. (Specifies a relative time for the
event to occur.)
hh:mm:ss schedules the event to occur at the time
specified by hh:mm:ss. (Specifies an absolute
time for the event to occur.)
dd-mmm-yy:hh:mm:ss
schedules the event to occur on the date and
time specified by dd-mmm-yy:hh:mm:ss.
DAILY hh:mm:ss schedules the event to occur every day at the
time specified by hh:mm:ss.
EVERY "DAY" hh:mm:ss
schedules the event to occur every week on the
day and time you specify. DAY specifies a
particular day of the week.
Other commands that control system events are the CANCEL and SHOW
QUEUES EVENTS commands.
1.5 CONTROLLING FAL
FAL, the File Access Listener, provides network remote access to the
TOPS-10 file system, and is an integral part of network
communications. FAL makes network file transfers possible in the
following ways:
o It acts as a target for NFT (Network File Transfer) programs
on other DECnet and ANF-10 hosts.
o It determines a user's access privileges to a requested file.
1-9
THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR
CONTROLLING FAL
You can use the following OPR commands to control the network
connections known as FAL-STREAMS:
o SET
o START
o ABORT
o SHOW
o SHUTDOWN
o STOP
o CONTINUE
o DEFINE
These commands function much as the commands that control batch
streams. For example, to define the type of network (DECnet) with
which FAL stream 2 will communicate, use the SET command as follows:
OPR>SET FAL-STREAM 2 NETWORK DECNET
OPR>
16:10:48 Fal-Stream 2 -- Set Accepted --
OPR>
1.6 CONTROLLING NQC STREAMS
The Network Queue Controller (NQC), using the Distributed Queue
Service (DQS) protocol, allows output requests to be sent to the
output queue of a remote node.
NQC streams control spooling requests for the NEBULA remote queuing
software. Current versions of NEBULA run as internal ORION
applications that are available with the standard monitor distribution
and GALAXY CUSPs. However, in order to implement remote queuing, your
system must be running DECnet-10 Version 3 and the remote queuing node
must be a VAX/VMS system running DQS software Version 1.0, or later.
You can use the following OPR commands to control NQC streams:
o ABORT - Terminates active NQC stream requests
o CONTINUE - Continues stopped NQC stream requests
o DEFINE - Defines network nodes and remote queues for
NQC streams.
1-10
THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR
CONTROLLING NQC STREAMS
o SET - Sets NQC parameters
o START - Starts NQC streams
o SHOW PARAMETERS - Displays NQC stream parameters
o SHOW STATUS - Displays NQC stream status
o SHUTDOWN - Shuts down NQC streams
o STOP - Stops NQC streams
See the TOPS-10 Operator's Guide for more information about
controlling NQC streams.
1.7 ORION TO OPR MESSAGES
ORION to OPR messages are one of the two types of messages displayed
on your OPR terminal, the other type are OPR messages indicating
errors in your commands (see Section 1.8). The types of ORION
messages displayed are:
o Error messages showing that ORION does not have the
appropriate devices, streams, nodes, or jobs to process a
command
o Messages from jobs that start processing in a stream or on a
device
o Messages from jobs that end processing in a stream or on a
device
o Messages specifying actions you must take for various
devices, streams, or jobs
o Messages to which you must RESPOND
o Results from TAKE command files
The first eight characters of the message ORION displays is the time
stamp. ORION time-stamps each OPR command it accepts and executes, as
well as all error messages.
In the following example, ORION displays the time (in hours, minutes,
and seconds) that it accepted and executed the SET PRINTER command.
OPR>SET PRINTER 0 FORMS-TYPE NARROW <RET>
12:00:00 Printer 0 -- Set Accepted --
1-11
THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR
ORION TO OPR MESSAGES
ORION displays error messages in the same format. In the following
example, ORION acknowledges the SHOW MESSAGES command by displaying
the information message shown below:
OPR>SHOW MESSAGES <RET>
12:00:00 -- No Outstanding Messages --
When a particular job starts to process in a batch stream or on a
device, ORION displays a message to notify you that the stream or
device is active. For example, ORION displays the following message
when a job named TEST begins to process in batch stream 0 for user
ZINA:
hh:mm:ss Batch-stream 0 -- Begin --
Job TEST Req #274 for ZINA [27,1234]
OPR>
Likewise, when a particular job ends processing, ORION displays a
message to notify you that the stream or device is not active and the
job has completed. For example, ORION displays the following message
when a job named TEST ends the process in batch stream 0 for user
ZINA.
hh:mm:ss Batch-stream 0 -- End --
Job TEST Req #274 for ZINA [27,1234]
OPR>
1.7.1 Controlling OPR Message Output
You may want to control the types of messages displayed at your
terminal. For example, if you have multiple terminals running OPR,
you can set the OUTPUT-DISPLAY to suit the needs of each OPR. To
control OPR message output, enter the ENABLE or DISABLE command
followed by the keyword, OUTPUT-DISPLAY, and one or more of the
following arguments:
ALL-MESSAGES (the default argument)
BATCH-MESSAGES
CARD-PUNCH-MESSAGES
CARD-READER-INTERPRETER-MESSAGES
FAL-MESSAGES
MOUNT-MESSAGES
PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH-MESSAGES
PLOTTER-MESSAGES
PRINTER-MESSAGES
READER-MESSAGES
USER-MESSAGES
1-12
THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR
ORION TO OPR MESSAGES
The ENABLE and DISABLE commands also have the following three
switches. If you do not specify one of these switches with one of the
above arguments, the system assumes all three types of messages.
/INFORMATION-MESSAGES
/JOB-MESSAGES
/OPR-ACTION-MESSAGES
Because the default is ALL-MESSAGES, you must disable ALL-MESSAGES
then enable the specific types of messages you want to see. For more
information about these commands and switches see Chapter 2.
1.8 OPR ERROR MESSAGE DESCRIPTIONS
OPR error messages are also displayed on your terminal. All OPR error
messages begin with "?" and are followed by the message explaining the
error. Note that "?" does not represent a fatal error in OPR, as it
does in some other system programs.
When you receive an OPR error message, you can type <CTRL/H> to retype
your OPR command up to the point where you entered the incorrect
keyword, switch, or value and specify the correct input to the
command.
Each error message described in this section gives an explanation of
the cause of the error message and the possible solution.
ERROR: ? Ambiguous
Reason: You issued an OPR command, but did not complete it.
For example, you may have left out the necessary
keyword or switch that would make the command execute
properly.
Recovery: Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command and then specify
the necessary keyword or switch.
ERROR: ? Ambiguous switch or keyword
Reason: Same as above.
Recovery: Same as above.
1-13
THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR
OPR ERROR MESSAGE DESCRIPTIONS
ERROR: ? CONFIRMATION Required
Reason: You gave a command but the command syntax is not valid.
Recovery: Check the command to see if you have provided all
necessary keywords, arguments, and/or switches. Check
that the hardware is available or that the device is
ready for use. Then give the command again. (See
Chapter 2 for the command's correct keywords, arguments
and switches.)
ERROR: ? Device Name name: Does Not Exist
Reason: You specified a device name (name:) in an OPR command
that is currently not recognized by the system. Such
devices are tape drives or disk drives.
Recovery: Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command and specify a
device name that the system acknowledges. Give the
SHOW STATUS command to find those devices that the
system recognizes.
ERROR: ? Does not match switch or keyword
Reason: You specified a switch or keyword for an OPR command
that can not take the switch or keyword specified.
Recovery: Type the command again and then specify a valid switch
or keyword for that command.
ERROR: ? Filename was not specified
Reason: You specified an OPR command that takes a file
specification as a keyword or value to a switch, but
did not specify the file name.
Recovery: Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command and then specify
the file name.
ERROR: ? File not found
Reason: You specified an OPR command that takes a file
specification as a keyword or value to a switch, but
the file was not found.
Recovery: Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command and then specify
the correct file specification.
1-14
THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR
OPR ERROR MESSAGE DESCRIPTIONS
ERROR: ? First nonspace character is not a digit
Reason: You specified a keyword or switch value that must be
numeric, but the first character is alphabetic or is a
special character.
Recovery: Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command and then specify a
numeric keyword or switch value with numeric
characters.
ERROR: ? Invalid device terminator
Reason: You specified a device with an illegal character in its
name or you did not include the colon (:) at the end of
the device name.
Recovery: Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command and then specify
the device name with the correct characters and include
the colon (:).
ERROR: ? Invalid HELP command specified
Reason: You specified an invalid OPR command as a keyword to
the HELP command.
Recovery: Give the HELP HELP command to get a list of valid
keywords (OPR commands) to the HELP command.
ERROR: ? Invalid guide word
Reason: You specified a guide word that does not pertain to the
OPR command that you specified, you misspelled the
guide word, or you used <ESC> recognition and then
typed <CTRL/H> before you pressed <RET>.
Recovery: Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command. If you must have
guide words with the OPR command, use recognition with
the ESCape key.
ERROR: ? Invalid node name
Reason: You specified a node name or number to the /NODE switch
for a node that has not been enabled, does not exist,
or has been misspelled.
Recovery: Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command and then specify
the correct node name or number to the /NODE switch.
You might have to ENABLE the node before you reissue
the command.
1-15
THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR
OPR ERROR MESSAGE DESCRIPTIONS
ERROR: ? Invalid OPR command specified
Reason: You specified an invalid command.
Recovery: Type a question mark to the OPR prompt to get a list of
valid OPR commands.
ERROR: ? Invalid token found
Reason: You specified an OPR command, such as HOLD or RELEASE,
but did not give one of the necessary arguments. The
necessary arguments are the request-id-number, the
project-programmer number, or an asterisk.
Recovery: Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command and include one of
the required arguments to the command.
ERROR: ? Invalid wildcard designator
Reason: You specified a wildcard character (* or %) within a
file specification for a keyword or switch value.
Recovery: Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command and then specify
the file specification without any wildcard characters.
OPR/ORION does not accept wildcard characters within a
file specification.
ERROR: ? Negative number improper
Reason: You specified a negative number for a device or stream
number. OPR does not accept negative numbers.
Recovery: Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command and then specify a
positive integer as a device or stream number.
ERROR: ? No such filename
Reason: You specified a file name as a keyword or switch value,
but the file name does not exist as you specified it.
Recovery: Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command and then specify
the correct file name as the keyword or switch value.
1-16
THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR
OPR ERROR MESSAGE DESCRIPTIONS
ERROR: ? No such file type
Reason: You specified a file extension as a keyword or switch
value, but the file extension does not exist as you
specified it.
Recovery: Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command and then specify
the correct file extension as the keyword or switch
value.
ERROR: ? Not a quoted string - does not begin with double
quote
Reason: You specified a message text, but did not include it
within double quotes ("message text").
Recovery: Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command and then specify
the message text within the required double quotes.
ERROR: ? Not confirmed
Reason: You specified too many keywords or switches to an OPR
command. OPR expected a carriage return after one of
the keywords or switches specified.
Recovery: Type <CTRL/H>; OPR retypes the command up to the point
where carriage return is expected. Then press <RET>.
ERROR: ? Only one file allowed
Reason: You specified the BACKSPACE or FORWARDSPACE command
with the /FILE switch and a numeric value greater than
1.
Recovery: Type <CTRL/H>; OPR retypes the command up to the point
where you entered the number of files. You can then
enter 1 or press <RET> . The /FILE switch defaults to
1.
ERROR: ? Priority not in range
Reason: You specified a priority number in the SET JOB-PRIORITY
command that is not in the range from 1 to 63.
Recovery: Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command and then specify a
priority number from 1 to 63.
1-17
THE OPERATOR INTERFACE, OPR
OPR ERROR MESSAGE DESCRIPTIONS
ERROR: ? Too many characters in node name
Reason: You specified too many characters in a name
specification to the /NODE switch. The /NODE name can
have only from one to six alphanumeric characters.
Recovery: Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command and then specify
the correct node name for the /NODE switch. The name
must be six characters or less.
ERROR: ? Value missing in date/time
Reason: You specified an OPR command that requires an argument
of date and/or time, such as the SET USAGE command.
Recovery: Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command and supply the
date and/or time as an argument. To check whether the
date and/or time is needed give the "?" command to list
your options.
1-18
CHAPTER 2
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
This chapter describes each of the OPR commands in detail. All OPR
commands must end with a carriage return (that is, you must press the
key labeled RETURN or CR).
There are seven possible headings in each command description. These
headings are listed and explained in the following text and are
omitted when not applicable to the command:
Function Contains one or two sentences briefly
describing what the command does.
Format Describes the syntax of the command,
including its command name, keywords,
switches, and switch values.
Keywords Describes the attributes or values that must
be supplied with the command.
Switches Describes the attributes that are preceded by
a slash (/) and are optional to the command
string. Switches that have values can also
have default values (supplied by <ESC>).
Arguments Describes the additional attributes and
values that are optional to the command
string. An argument that takes a value (or
word) can also have a default value (or
word)(supplied by <ESC>).
Restrictions Describes the limitations and peculiarities
of the command. It also explains common
error messages you can receive while using
the command.
Examples Shows a few common ways to use the command.
2-1
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
ABORT
2.1 ABORT
Function
The ABORT command terminates the following types of active
requests:
o input/output device requests
o batch stream requests
o FAL stream requests
o NQC stream requests
Format
OPR>ABORT keyword argument /switch<RET>
Keywords
BATCH-STREAM aborts the specified batch stream. A batch
stream is a pseudo-terminal that interacts
with the system to execute a batch job.
CARD-PUNCH aborts the specified card punch job.
FAL-STREAM aborts the specified FAL stream.
NQC-STREAM aborts the specified NQC stream.
PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH aborts the specified paper-tape-punch job.
PLOTTER aborts the specified plotter job.
PRINTER aborts the specified line printer job.
READER aborts the specified card reader job. Jobs
read through the card reader become job
requests in the batch input queue.
2-2
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
ABORT
Arguments
nn specifies the stream number of the batch, NQC,
or FAL stream to be aborted, or the unit
number of the input/output device that is
currently processing a job. You must specify
an argument.
n:m specifies a range of stream or unit numbers.
Switches
/NODE:identifier specifies a remote node for which the command
will be effective. For example, use
/NODE:KL1026 to specify the node named KL1026.
If you do not specify a node identifier, your
own node is the default. Note that you cannot
abort jobs at a remote host node.
/ERROR-PROCESSING specifies that any error recovery procedures
specified by the user who submitted the batch
job will not be ignored.
/NOERROR-PROCESSING
specifies that any error recovery procedures
provided by the user who submitted the batch
job be ignored when the batch job is aborted.
/PURGE aborts the specified job and all output from
the job. When you purge a batch-stream job,
no log file is printed.
/REASON:comment allows you to include a comment explaining why
the request has been canceled. This comment
appears in the batch log file and at the
user's terminal. If the comment is longer
than one line, type a hyphen before you press
RETURN and continue the comment on the next
line. If you press RETURN immediately after
the colon, OPR responds with the instruction:
ENTER TEXT AND TERMINATE WITH ^Z. You can
then enter as many lines of text as necessary.
When your comment is complete, press <CTRL/Z>.
2-3
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
ABORT
Restrictions
The only switches available to the READER keyword are the /NODE
and /REASON switches, because a card reader input job does not
become a request until the last card ($EOJ card) has been read.
The only switch available to the NQC-STREAM keyword is /NODE.
The /ERROR-PROCESSING and /NOERROR-PROCESSING switches are valid
only with the BATCH-STREAM keyword.
Examples
1. Use the ABORT command to abort a batch stream job with
NOERROR-PROCESSING because you were instructed to do so by
the user who submitted the job.
OPR>ABORT BATCH-STREAM 2 /NOERROR-PROCESSING /REASON:<RET>
Enter text and terminate with ^Z
OPERATIONS WAS INSTRUCTED TO DO SO BY user HURLEY<RET>
^Z
OPR>
12:31:05 Batch-stream 2 -- ABORT command queued --
Job TEST09 Req #132 for HURLEY [10,2345]
OPERATIONS WAS INSTRUCTED TO DO SO BY user HURLEY
with Noerror-processing
OPR>
12:31:17 Batch-stream 2 -- End --
Job TEST09 Req #132 for HURLEY [10,2345]
-- Job Aborted by Operator --
OPR>
2. Use the ABORT command to abort a line printer job currently
printing on printer 1.
OPR>ABORT PRINTER 1<RET>
OPR>
13:24:56 Printer 1 -- Aborting --
Job BATCH1 Req #37 for HOVSEPIAN [27,3113]
OPR>
13:25:12 Printer 1 -- End --
Job BATCH1 Req #37 for HOVSEPIAN [27,3113]
-- Job Aborted by Operator --
OPR>
2-4
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
ALIGN
2.2 ALIGN
Function
The ALIGN command prints a "forms-alignment" file repeatedly on
the line printer so that you can align the paper.
You may have to align special forms for a particular line-printer
job, such as payroll checks or invoices. The ALIGN command
allows you to adjust the forms and the line printer as many times
as necessary to print the job correctly.
Format
OPR>ALIGN keyword nn /switch (or) argument<RET>
Keyword
PRINTER nn specifies the line printer (output device)
unit number (nn) that will print the forms
alignment file (for example, 0 for LPT0, 1 for
LPT1, and so forth). You must specify the
PRINTER keyword and the unit number.
Switches
/NODE:identifier specifies the name of a node in the network.
It identifies a remote node for which the
command should be effective. For example, to
specify the node named KL1026, use
/NODE:KL1026. If you do not specify a node
identifier, your own node is the default.
/PAUSE:nnnn specifies the time in seconds (nnnn) that the
line printer waits between repeats of the
particular print job. The default of the
/PAUSE switch is 10 seconds.
/REPEAT-COUNT:nnnn
specifies the number of times to print the
file (starting from the beginning). The
default value of the /REPEAT-COUNT is 25.
/STOP specifies that normal printing be resumed and
stops the alignment of forms on the line
printer.
2-5
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
ALIGN
Argument
alignment-filespec
specifies a file to be printed for aligning
the forms. The default file specification is
SYS:formsname.ALP, where formsname is the name
of the form to be aligned, such as NARROW.
This alignment file has a format of one
printed page of output that can be repeated on
the line printer so that you can align the
paper.
Restrictions
If you specify the ALIGN command and the alignment file cannot be
found, the following error message appears:
hh:mm:ss Printer n -- Alignment Error --
Cannot read ALIGN file 'filespec'
If you specify the ALIGN command with the /STOP switch while the
print request is printing, the following error message appears:
hh:mm:ss Printer n -- /STOP Illegal --
Alignment not in Progress
If you specify the ALIGN command while an alignment is in
progress, the following error message appears:
hh:mm:ss Printer n -- Alignment already in Progress --
Examples
1. Specify line printer 0 in the ALIGN command to align some
special forms and specify a repeat-count of 15.
OPR>ALIGN PRINTER 0 /REPEAT-COUNT:15<RET>
OPR>
10:12:07 Printer 0 -- Alignment Scheduled --
OPR>
2-6
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
ALIGN
2. Specify line printer 0 in the ALIGN command for forms
alignment with the use of the alignment file PAYCHK.ALP. By
the default values of the /REPEAT-COUNT and the /PAUSE
switches, the ALIGN command repeats the file 25 times with a
pause of 10 seconds between repeats.
OPR>ALIGN PRINTER 0 PAYCHK.ALP<RET>
OPR>
09:34:12 Printer 0 -- Alignment Scheduled --
OPR>
3. Specify line printer 3 in the ALIGN command for forms
alignment with a pause of 30 seconds between repeats. The
forms are aligned after one repeat and you stop the alignment
of forms on line printer 3.
OPR>ALIGN PRINTER 3 /PAUSE:30<RET>
OPR>
10:34:03 Printer 3 -- Alignment Scheduled --
OPR>ALIGN PRINTER 3 /STOP<RET>
OPR>
10:38:29 Printer 3 -- Alignment Discontinued --
OPR>
2-7
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
BACKSPACE
2.3 BACKSPACE
Function
The BACKSPACE command reprints pages in the file currently being
printed on the line printer.
You may have to backspace a file that is currently being printed
on the line printer, if the forms become jammed in the printing
mechanism. The BACKSPACE command allows you to backspace the
print file so that the pages of the file that were jammed or
incorrectly printed can be repeated.
Format
OPR>BACKSPACE keyword nn /switch<RET>
Keywords
PRINTER nn specifies the line printer (output device)
unit number of the line printer that will
backspace the file currently being printed
(for example, 0 for LPT0, 1 for LPT1, and so
forth). You must specify the unit number;
there is no default.
Switches
/NODE:identifier specifies the name of a node in the network.
It identifies a remote node for which the
command should be effective. For example, to
specify the node named KL1026, use
/NODE:KL1026. If you do not specify a node
identifier, your own node is the default.
2-8
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
BACKSPACE
You must specify one of the following switches:
/COPIES:nnnn specifies the number of additional copies to
be printed. The number you specify is added
to the number of copies that the user queued
with the PRINT command. For example, if a
user issues the command:
PRINT FOO.BAR/COPIES:25
and you issue the BACKSPACE command with
/COPIES:10 while FOO.BAR is being printed on
the line printer, the total number of copies
printed will be 35.
/FILE specifies that one file be backspaced when a
multi-file PRINT request has been given by a
user. For example, if a user issues the
command:
PRINT FOO1.BAR,FOO2.BAR,FOO3.BAR
and you issue the BACKSPACE command with /FILE
while FOO3.BAR is being printed on the line
printer, FOO2.BAR will be printed again.
/PAGES:nnnn specifies the number of pages to be backspaced
for the file that is currently being printed.
The /PAGES switch is the default of the
BACKSPACE command. If you do not specify
either the /COPIES or the /FILE switch, then
you must specify the /PAGES switch. The
number you specify (nnnn) refers to the
physical number of pages and not to the number
of disk pages used for storing the file.
Examples
1. Specify line printer 0 in the BACKSPACE command to add an
additional 15 copies to a print request of 15 copies.
OPR>BACKSPACE PRINTER 0 /COPIES:15<RET>
OPR>
13:43:53 Printer 0 -- Backspaced 15 Copies --
OPR>
2-9
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
BACKSPACE
2. Specify line printer 2 in the BACKSPACE command to backspace
one file from the file currently being printed.
OPR>BACKSPACE PRINTER 2 /FILE<RET>
OPR>
11:34:23 Printer 2 -- Backspaced 1 File --
OPR>
3. Specify line printer 1 in the BACKSPACE command to backspace
12 pages from the page currently being printed because of a
paper jam.
OPR>BACKSPACE PRINTER 1 /PAGE:12<RET>
OPR>
10:23:50 Printer 1 -- Backspaced 12 Pages --
OPR>
2-10
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
CANCEL
2.4 CANCEL
Function
The CANCEL command enables you to cancel the following requests:
o active or waiting job requests
o tape or structure mount requests
o event requests
The system assigns request numbers to all user requests. The OPR
command SHOW QUEUES displays the requests, the request numbers,
and the names of the users who submitted the jobs. To cancel a
specific request, supply a request number for the argument. To
cancel all requests from a particular user, supply the user's PPN
for the argument.
Format
OPR>CANCEL keyword argument<RET>
Keywords
BATCH-REQUEST cancels active or waiting batch job requests.
CARD-PUNCH-REQUEST
cancels active or waiting card punch job
requests.
EVENT-REQUEST cancels any of the following active or pending
events:
o billing file closure (BILCLS)
o OPR log file closure (OPRFIL)
o usage file closure (USGFIL)
o scheduled system shutdown (KSYS)
o command file execution (TAKFIL)
2-11
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
CANCEL
MOUNT-REQUEST cancels tape or structure mount requests. If
you specify a structure name, the CANCEL
command cancels all requests for that
structure.
PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH-REQUEST
cancels active or waiting paper-tape-punch
requests.
PLOTTER-REQUEST cancels active or waiting plotter requests.
PRINTER-REQUEST cancels active or waiting line printer
requests.
Arguments
request-id-number cancels a single request as specified by the
appropriate keyword for a particular user.
The canceled request can be active or waiting.
[PPN] cancels all requests described by the keyword
and made by the given user's
project-programmer number [PPN]. This
argument cannot be used with the MOUNT-REQUEST
keyword.
* cancels all waiting and active requests
described by the keyword.
structure-name: specifies a 1- to 4-character disk structure
name that a user has requested you to mount.
The name must end with a colon (:). The
CANCEL MOUNT-REQUEST command for a structure
name cancels all waiting requests for that
structure mount. (See the SHOW QUEUES
MOUNT-REQUESTS command.)
You must cancel dismounted structures
separately, using the request-id-number for
the argument.
2-12
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
CANCEL
Switches
/REASON:comment allows you to include a comment explaining why
the request has been canceled. This comment
appears in the batch log file and at the
user's terminal. If the comment is longer
than one line, type a hyphen before you press
RETURN and continue the comment on the next
line. If you press RETURN immediately after
the colon, OPR responds with the instruction:
ENTER TEXT AND TERMINATE WITH ^Z. You can
then enter as many lines of text as necessary.
When your comment is complete, press <CTRL/Z>.
Restriction
You cannot cancel mount requests after the tape or structure has
been mounted on the device. If you need to do this, you must
ABORT the job and DISMOUNT the tape or structure.
Examples
1. Use the CANCEL MOUNT-REQUEST command to cancel all requests
for mounting the structure DSKX:. All mount requests for
this structure are currently waiting.
OPR>CANCEL MOUNT-REQUEST DSKX: /REASON:<RET>
Enter text and terminate with ^Z
CANNOT FIND STRUCTURE DSKX<RET>
THANK YOU - OPERATIONS^Z
OPR>
15:32:08 -- 3 Mount Requests Canceled --
OPR>
2. Use the CANCEL BATCH-REQUEST for all batch requests from user
[10,4733].
OPR>CANCEL BATCH-REQUEST [10,4733]<RET>
OPR>
12:09:34 -- 2 Jobs Canceled --
OPR>
3. Use the CANCEL PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH-REQUEST to cancel all
requests from all users for that device.
OPR>CANCEL PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH <RET>
OPR>
09:34:56 -- 7 Jobs Canceled --
OPR>
2-13
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
CANCEL
4. Use the CANCEL EVENT-REQUEST command to cancel a pending
ORION log file closure.
OPR>SHOW QUEUES EVENTS<RET>
OPR>
16:06:19 -- System Queues Listing --
Event Queue:
Type Req# Expiration Description
-------- ------ ------------------ -----------------------
BILCLS 20 19-Nov-88 16:59:59 Prime time rates end
OPRFIL 282 19-Nov-88 18:00:00 ORION log file closure
USGFIL 42 19-Nov-88 23:59:30 Usage file closure
OPRFIL 34 20-Nov-88 0:00:00 ORION log file closure
BILCLS 12 20-Nov-88 7:59:59 Discount rates end
* KSYS 21 28-Nov-88 0:00:00 Debug new monitor
There are 6 events in the queue (1 in progress)
OPR>CANCEL EVENT-REQUEST 282
OPR>
16:06:44 -- 1 Job Canceled --
2-14
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
CLOSE
2.5 CLOSE
Function
The CLOSE command closes the current ORION log file, renames it,
and creates a new log file. The command arguments enable you to
specify a date and time to close the ORION log file.
The ORION log file, OPERAT.LOG, records all OPR-to-ORION commands
and transactions performed at the operator's console. When you
issue the CLOSE command, OPR transfers these commands and
transactions to the ORNLOG.nnn file and clears the buffer file,
OPERAT.LOG. You can then print the ORNLOG.nnn file to obtain a
hard-copy of all the operating processes for a given time period.
OPERAT.LOG is now open for more OPR-to-ORION commands and
transactions.
You may choose a name other than OPERAT.LOG for the ORION log
file at GALGEN time. See the TOPS-10 Software Installation Guide
for more information about GALGEN.
Format
OPR>CLOSE keyword argument<RET>
Keyword
LOG closes the ORION log file that was created
when ORION was started. You must include this
keyword. You must use the ENABLE LOGGING
command for the logging facility to occur.
Use the DISABLE LOGGING command to stop the
logging facility. For more information about
enabling and disabling the logging facility,
see the ENABLE and DISABLE commands.
Arguments
NOW closes the ORION log file immediately.
+hh:mm:ss closes the ORION log file in number of hours,
minutes, and seconds that you specify from the
current time. The time must be at least five
minutes from the current time.
2-15
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
CLOSE
hh:mm:ss closes the ORION log file at the time you
enter for hh:mm:ss.
dd-mmm-yy:hh:mm:ss
closes the ORION log file on the day, month,
year, and time that you enter.
DAILY hh:mm:ss closes the ORION log file every day at the
time you enter.
EVERY "day" hh:mm:ss
closes the ORION log file every week on the
day and time that you enter. "Day" specifies
a particular day of the week.
Example
Use the CLOSE command to close the ORION log file and open a new log
file automatically.
OPR>CLOSE LOG NOW<RET>
OPR>
15:10:33 Event OPRFIL queued, request #426
OPR>
15:10:34 Log file DSKA:OPERAT.LOG[3,3] renamed to DSKA:OPERAT.001[3,3]
OPR>
2-16
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
CONTINUE
2.6 CONTINUE
Function
The CONTINUE command continues the following requests that were
stopped using the STOP command:
o input/output device requests
o batch stream requests
o FAL stream requests
o NQC stream requests
Format
OPR>CONTINUE keyword nn /switch<RET>
Keywords
BATCH-STREAM continues the specified batch stream (or range
of batch streams). A batch stream is a
pseudo-terminal that interacts with the system
to execute a batch job.
CARD-PUNCH continues the specified card-punch (or range
of such devices).
FAL-STREAM continues a specified FAL stream or range of
FAL streams. You may not use the /NODE switch
with this keyword.
NQC-STREAM continues a specified NQC stream or range of
NQC streams.
PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH continues the specified paper-tape-punch (or
range of such devices).
PLOTTER continues the specified plotter (or range of
such devices).
PRINTER continues the specified line-printer (or range
of such devices).
READER continues the specified card-reader (or range
of such devices).
2-17
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
CONTINUE
Arguments
nn specifies the stream number of the batch, NQC,
or FAL stream to be continued, or the unit
number of the input/output device that has
been temporarily stopped. You must specify a
stream/unit number.
n:m specifies a range of stream/unit numbers. You
can specify this range instead of a single
stream/unit number. The colon must separate
the two numbers. The n represents the
low-order number and the m represents the
high-order number.
Switch
/NODE:identifier specifies a remote node for which the command
will be effective. For example, to specify
the node named KL1026, use /NODE:KL1026. If
you do not specify a node identifier, your own
node is the default.
Examples
1. Use the CONTINUE command to continue the card reader after it
was stopped to prevent a card-reader jam.
OPR>CONTINUE READER 0<RET>
OPR>
09:23:19 Reader 0 -- Continued --
OPR>
2. Use the CONTINUE command to continue a batch stream that was
previously stopped.
OPR>CONTINUE BATCH-STREAM 2<RET>
OPR>
12:10:12 Batch-stream 2 -- Continued --
OPR>
2-18
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
CONTINUE
3. Use the CONTINUE command to continue all line printers after
they were stopped temporarily.
OPR>CONTINUE PRINTER 0:1<RET>
OPR>
11:40:23 Printer 0 -- Continued --
OPR>
11:40:24 Printer 1 -- Continued --
OPR>
2-19
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
DEFINE FILE-ACCESS
2.7 DEFINE FILE-ACCESS
Function
The DEFINE FILE-ACCESS command allows you to define FAL
accessibility. You can specify the default [PPN] for FAL
connections, as well as a list of PPNs or nodes that are not
allowed to establish FAL connections.
Format
OPR>DEFINE FILE-ACCESS argument<RET>
Arguments
DEFAULT-PPN [PPN]
specifies a [PPN] to be used if the user does
not include one when initiating a FAL
connection.
REJECTION-LIST node name [PPN]
specifies nodes or [PPN]s that may not establish FAL connections.
Examples
1. Use the DEFINE FILE-ACCESS command to reject all FAL connections
for [1,2].
OPR>DEFINE FILE-ACCESS REJECTION-LIST [1,2]
OPR>
11:00:47 -- Rejection list defined for all FAL-Streams --
OPR>
2. Use the DEFINE FILE-ACCESS command to use [377777,377777] for
FAL connections if no PPN is given.
OPR>DEFINE FILE-ACCESS DEFAULT-PPN [377777,377777]
OPR>
11:08:06 -- Default network PPN defined for all FAL-Streams --
OPR>
2-20
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
DEFINE NETWORK-QUEUE
2.8 DEFINE NETWORK-QUEUE
Function
The DEFINE NETWORK-QUEUE command allows you to define remote
queue names for NQC streams.
Format
OPR>DEFINE NETWORK-QUEUE queue REMOTE node object unit<RET>
Arguments
queue specifies the queue name you are defining.
REMOTE specifies that the destination node is remote
from your node. LOCAL is not implemented.
node specifies the destination node to which the
device is attached.
object specifies the type of device. The object must
be PRINTER or PLOTTER.
unit specifies the device unit number or name. The
default unit is the generic print or plot
queue.
Example
Use the DEFINE NETWORK-QUEUE command to define a new remote
network queue.
OPR>DEFINE NODE JUNIPR SERVER
OPR>
11:17:49 -- Define for node JUNIPR accepted --
OPR>
OPR>DEFINE NETWORK-QUEUE LPS40$QUEUE REMOTE JUNIPR PRINTER 0
OPR>
11:26:20 -- Define for network queue LPS40$QUEUE accepted --
OPR>
2-21
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
DEFINE NODE
2.9 DEFINE NODE
Function
The DEFINE NODE command allows you to specify one of the
following:
o A destination server node for NQC streams
o A printer on a LAT server
o A DN60 node to perform IBM communications
NQC Stream Format
OPR>DEFINE NODE node-name SERVER<RET>
NQC Stream Arguments
node-name specifies the name of the destination node.
SERVER specifies that the node is for NQC streams.
LAT-SERVER Format
OPR>DEFINE NODE node-name LAT-SERVER /NODE-NAME:name /switch<RET>
LAT-SERVER Arguments
node-name specifies the destination node name of the LAT
server.
LAT-SERVER specifies that the node is a LAT server with a
printer.
LAT-SERVER Switches
/NODE-NAME specifies the name of the LAT-SERVER node.
This switch is always necessary.
/PORT-NAME specifies the port name on the LAT-SERVER.
/SERVICE-NAME specifies the name of the printer service you
request on the LAT-SERVER.
2-22
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
DEFINE NODE
IBM Communications Formats
OPR>DEFINE NODE node-name station mode port line /switch<RET>
OPR>DEFINE NODE node-name station mode CPU n DL10-PORT n -<RET>
LINE n /switch<RET>
OPR>DEFINE NODE node-name station mode CPU n DTE n LINE n -<RET>
/switch<RET>
IBM Communications Arguments
node-name specifies a one- to six-character name of an
IBM remote station.
station specifies a remote station type. Valid
stations are:
2780
3780
HASP
The HASP multileaving remote station is the
default type.
mode specifies a host or a remote station with
which the IBM node is to communicate. Valid
communication modes are:
EMULATION specifies a host.
TERMINATION specifies a remote station.
TERMINATION is the default communications
mode.
port specifies the port number from the front end
to the TOPS-10 host.
line specifies the line number from the front end
to the modem communicating with the remote
site.
CPU n specifies which CPU is to communicate.
2-23
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
DEFINE NODE
DL10-PORT n
or
DTE n specifies which device is to communicate.
LINE n specifies the line number from the front end
to the modem communicating with the remote
site.
After you specify a node name and type, you can use the SET NODE
command to change the default parameters for the node. For more
information about IBM communications software, see the TOPS-10
IBM Emulation/Termination Manual.
IBM Communications Switches
/SIGNON-REQUIRED specifies that the node must send a signon
card when starting up or starting a job. This
is the default.
/NO-SIGNON-REQUIRED
specifies that the node does not have to send
a signon card.
Restrictions
For a KL10, the port number can be either 11 (for DTE1), 12 (for
DTE2), or 13 (for DTE3). For a KS10, the port number can be
either 10 (for KMC/DMC line 0) or 11 (for KMC/DMC line 1). For
DL10s, the port numbers are in a range from 0 through 7. Never
use port 10 on a KL10.
For a KL10, the line number must be from 0 to 5; for a KS10, the
line number must be either 0 or 1.
If you specify a port number other than 11, 12, or 13, or a line
number greater than 5, either of the following error messages
appears:
? First nonspace character is not a digit
? Invalid character in number
2-24
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
DEFINE NODE
Examples
1. Use the DEFINE NODE command to define a network server for
NQC streams.
OPR>DEFINE NODE JUNIPR SERVER
OPR>
11:17:49 -- Define for node JUNIPR accepted --
OPR>
2. Use the DEFINE NODE command to define a printer on a LAT
server.
OPR>DEFINE NODE TLN03 LAT-SERVER/NODE:L12/PORT:LN03
OPR>
11:32:31 -- Define for Node TLN03 Accepted --
OPR>
3. Use the DEFINE NODE command to define IBM communications node
IBM2.
OPR>DEFINE NODE IBM2 HASP EMULATION 11 0<RET>
OPR>
09:18:34 -- Define for Node IBM2 Accepted --
OPR>
4. Use the DEFINE NODE command to define a remote station as an
IBM 3780 termination node to communicate from the host.
OPR>DEFINE NODE IBM3 3780 TERMINATION 12 1<RET>
OPR>
15:32:09 -- Define for Node IBM3 Accepted --
OPR>
5. Use the DEFINE NODE command to define IBM communications
nodes IBM5 and IBM3 on an SMP system.
OPR>DEFINE NODE IBM5 2780 EMULATION CPU 2 DTE 1 LINE 2<RET>
OPR>
10:46:03 -- Define for node IBM5 accepted --
OPR>DEFINE NODE IBM3 2780 EMULATION CPU 1 DL10-PORT 0 -<RET>
LINE 0<RET>
OPR>
10:47:23 -- Define for node IBM3 accepted --
OPR>
2-25
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
DISABLE
2.10 DISABLE
Function
The DISABLE command turns off (or stops) the features listed
below.
o Scheduling of jobs on specified CPUs.
o The ORION logging facility for recording OPR/ORION commands
and transactions.
o Output display of messages.
o Queue requests so that users cannot request jobs to be
processed on certain types of devices.
o Structure and volume recognition for structure and tape
mounts.
Format
OPR>DISABLE keyword argument /switch<RET>
Keywords
JOB-SCHEDULING removes a specified CPU from the system pool
of available resources. The CPU may perform
I/O, but it does not schedule user jobs.
LOGGING disables the centralized logging facility of
ORION. (This facility logs all messages
passing through the operating system and
stores these messages in a log file.) When
this facility is disabled, there are no
records kept of the messages and interactions
between ORION and the system. However, the
CTY shows all messages and interactions if you
have not DISABLEd the OUTPUT-DISPLAY of
ALL-MESSAGES at the CTY. This keyword has no
additional arguments or switches.
OUTPUT-DISPLAY disables the display of specified messages on
your console. The message types are the
arguments and switches to this keyword.
QUEUES disables all users from making queue requests
for the specified devices.
2-26
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
DISABLE
STRUCTURE-RECOGNITION
specifies that the system should not read the
home blocks of all volumes of a structure when
it is mounted on a disk drive. The DISABLE
STRUCTURE-RECOGNITION command affects all
structures to be mounted, but it does not
affect currently mounted structures.
VOLUME-RECOGNITION
disables volume recognition for labeled tapes
and structures. Volume recognition allows you
to mount labeled tapes and structures on
tape/disk drives without having to identify
the tape or structure to the system. When
volume recognition is disabled for a disk
drive (or all disk drives), you must use the
RECOGNIZE command to force the system to
recognize the mounted structure. When volume
recognition is disabled for a tape drive (or
all tape drives), you must use the RECOGNIZE
command to force the system to recognize the
mounted labeled tape. (The IDENTIFY command
is for unlabeled tape mounts.) For more
information, see the IDENTIFY and RECOGNIZE
commands.
JOB-SCHEDULING Arguments
ONLY CPUn removes the specified CPU from the system pool
of available resources, and enables other
currently disabled CPUs (n = CPU number).
CPUn removes the specified CPU from the system pool
of available resources, but does not affect
other CPUs (n = CPU number).
OUTPUT-DISPLAY Arguments
ALL-MESSAGES disables the display of all operator, system,
user, and error messages on your OPR terminal.
ALL-MESSAGES is enabled by default.
BATCH-MESSAGES disables the display of messages generated
during batch job processing.
CARD-PUNCH-MESSAGES
disables the display of messages generated by
card-punch jobs.
2-27
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
DISABLE
CARD-READER-INTERPRETER-MESSAGES
disables the display of messages generated by
card reader jobs or batch jobs submitted with
the /READER switch.
CATALOG-MESSAGES disables the display of messages generated by
changes to the system tape and disk catalogs.
CONFIG-MESSAGES disables the display of messages generated by
changes to the system configuration.
EVENT-MESSAGES disables the display of messages generated by
special events such as billing file closure,
ORION log file closure, scheduled system
shutdown, or Usage accounting file closure.
See the SHOW QUEUES EVENTS command for more
information on these event types.
FAL-MESSAGES disables the display of messages generated
during network file access requests.
LCP-MESSAGES disables the display of messages generated by
the LAT Control Program.
MOUNT-MESSAGES disables the display of messages generated
when users request tape and structure mounts
and dismounts.
NCP-MESSAGES disables the display of messages generated by
the DECnet Network Control Program (NCP).
PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH-MESSAGES
disables the display of messages generated by
paper-tape-punch jobs.
PLOTTER-MESSAGES disables the display of messages generated by
plotter jobs.
PRINTER-MESSAGES disables the display of messages generated by
line printer jobs.
QUOTA MESSAGES disables the display of messages generated by
changes to the system catalogs.
2-28
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
DISABLE
READER-MESSAGES disables the display of messages generated by
card reader jobs.
USER-MESSAGES disables the display of messages generated
when users make requests to you through the
PLEASE program.
QUEUES Arguments
ALL-INPUT-OUTPUT disables all batch, card-punch,
paper-tape-punch, plotter, and printer queue
requests.
BATCH disables all batch queue requests.
CARD-PUNCH disables all card-punch queue requests.
PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH disables all paper-tape-punch queue requests.
PLOTTER disables all plotter queue requests.
PRINTER disables all printer queue requests.
VOLUME-RECOGNITION Arguments
DISK-DRIVES disables volume recognition for all disk
drives.
TAPE-DRIVES disables volume recognition for all tape
drives.
disk-drive-name: disables volume recognition on the specified
disk drive. You must include the colon. The
name is in the format of xxcn:, where xx
represents the device type (RP for RP04 or
RP07, and RN for RP20); c represents the disk
controller identification; and n is the disk
drive number.
tape-drive-name: disables volume recognition on the specified
tape drive. You must include the colon. The
name is in the format of MTxn:, where x is the
tape controller identification and n is the
tape drive number.
2-29
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
DISABLE
OUTPUT-DISPLAY Switches
/INFORMATION-MESSAGES
disables the display of informational
messages, such as errors that occur due to an
application problem. Messages that require no
operator response are considered informational
messages.
/JOB-MESSAGES disables the display of messages that notify
you when a device or stream begins or ends
processing a job request.
/OPR-ACTION-MESSAGES
disables the display of messages that notify
you of action to be performed as requested by
a user or a processing job. Messages that
require a response, such as PLEASE messages,
will be displayed.
If you do not specify one of these switches,
all three types of messages are assumed by
default.
Examples
1. You have scheduled a system shutdown in two hours and your
queues have approximately two hours' worth of jobs left to be
processed. You disable queue requests so that the queues can
be emptied before the system shutdown.
OPR>DISABLE QUEUES<RET>
OPR>
16:34:03 -- System Queue's Entry Processing Disabled --
OPR>
2-30
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
DISABLE
2. You have started OPR on a terminal to display only
information messages. By default, when OPR is started, all
messages are displayed. Therefore, you must disable all
messages except information messages.
.R OPR<RET>
OPR>DISABLE OUTPUT-DISPLAY ALL-MESSAGES/JOB-MESSAGES<RET>
OPR>
08:45:18 -- OUTPUT DISPLAY of OPR Modified --
OPR>DISABLE OUTPUT-DISPLAY ALL-MESSAGES/OPR-ACTION-MESSAGES<RET>
OPR>
08:46:07 -- OUTPUT DISPLAY of OPR Modified --
OPR>
3. You DISABLE volume recognition on tape drive MTA2: before
you mount and prepare a scratch tape to be initialized.
OPR>DISABLE VOLUME-RECOGNITION MTA2:<RET>
OPR>
14:05:12 Device MTA2 -- Volume Recognition is Disabled --
OPR>
4. Use the DISABLE JOB-SCHEDULING command to disable
job-scheduling on CPU1.
OPR>DISABLE JOB-SCHEDULING CPU1<RET>
OPR>
16:08:02 -- Job scheduling disabled for specified CPU(s) --
OPR>
2-31
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
DISMOUNT
2.11 DISMOUNT
Function
The DISMOUNT command allows you to dismount (and remove) a
structure currently mounted on a disk drive, or a magnetic tape
currently mounted on a tape drive.
When you issue the DISMOUNT command for a structure, the
structure is queued for removal. If other users have mounted the
structure, a message appears listing statistics about the
structure and asks you to respond with ABORT to cancel the
dismount, or PROCEED to permit the dismount.
When you issue the DISMOUNT command for a tape drive, the tape
rewinds itself completely from the take-up wheel, providing that
no user is currently using the tape. If a user is using the tape
on the specified tape drive, OPR will reject the DISMOUNT
command.
Format
OPR>DISMOUNT keyword argument /switch<RET>
Keywords
STRUCTURE specifies a disk structure currently mounted
on a disk drive.
TAPE-DRIVE specifies a tape drive that has a magnetic
tape mounted and ready on it.
Arguments
structure-name: specifies the logical name of the structure to
be dismounted and removed. The colon must be
included with the structure name specified.
An example of a logical name is DSKC:.
tape-drive-name: specifies the logical name of the tape drive
which currently has the desired tape to
dismount on it. The colon must be included
with the tape drive name. The name is in the
format of MTxn:, where x is the tape
controller identification and n is the tape
drive number. For example, MTA0: is a
magtape device name.
2-32
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
DISMOUNT
Switches
/NOCHECK specifies that the structure is to be
dismounted without regard to the current
status and/or users on the structure. With
the /NOCHECK switch, the system does not check
the mount count of the structure or any other
warning conditions and you receive no error
messages. The dismount is executed
immediately.
/REMOVE specifies that the structure will be removed.
With the /REMOVE switch, the structure ceases
its rotation and comes to a stop
automatically, so that you can remove it from
the disk drive. Without the specification of
the /REMOVE switch, you must press the STOP
button on the drive to stop and remove the
structure.
Restrictions
When you issue a DISMOUNT command for a structure that is in the
Active Swapping List, System Search List, Crash Dump List,
contains the STRLST.SYS file, or has the [3,3] UFD directory, you
receive a warning message. This message allows you to respond
with either ABORT to cancel the dismount, or PROCEED to proceed
with the dismount. In addition, this warning message appears if
any other user has requested this structure mount (refer to
Example 1).
If there are other users who have mounted the structure and you
really wish to remove the structure, it is recommended that you
send a message to all users of the system before you respond with
PROCEED, to allow all users to complete their tasks on that
structure.
You can use the LOCK command to prevent other users from
accessing the structure. See the LOCK command description for
more information.
2-33
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
DISMOUNT
Examples
1. Use the DISMOUNT command to dismount the structure MISC:.
OPR>DISMOUNT STRUCTURE MISC:<RET>
OPR>
16:29:30 <5> Device MISC: -- Problem removing structure --
Mount count = 1
Type 'RESPOND <number> ABORT' to not dismount structure MISC.
Type 'RESPOND <number> PROCEED' to dismount structure MISC
anyway.
OPR>RESPOND 5 PROCEED<RET>
OPR>
16:01:18 -- Structure MISC Dismounted --
From Unit: RBA2
OPR>
2. Use the DISMOUNT command to dismount the tape volume
currently mounted on tape drive MTA0:.
OPR>DISMOUNT TAPE-DRIVE MTA0:<RET>
OPR>
16:45:01 Device MTA0 -- Unloading --
OPR>
2-34
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
ENABLE
2.12 ENABLE
Function
The ENABLE command turns on (or starts) the features listed
below.
o It enables you to turn processors on-line in a multiprocessor
system.
o It enables the ORION logging facility for recording OPR/ORION
commands and transactions.
o It enables output display of messages previously disabled
with the DISABLE command.
o It enables queue requests so that users can request jobs to
be processed.
o It enables structure and volume recognition for structure and
tape mounts.
o It enables timesharing.
Format
OPR>ENABLE keyword argument /switch<RET>
Keywords
JOB-SCHEDULING adds the specified CPU to the system pool of
available resources. The arguments ALL, ONLY
CPUn and CPUn specify which CPUs will schedule
jobs. JOB-SCHEDULING applies only to
Symmetric Multi-Processing systems. To remove
a CPU from the system pool of available
resources, see the DISABLE JOB-SCHEDULING
command.
QUEUES enables queue requests on the specified input
or output devices.
2-35
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
ENABLE
LOGGING enables the ORION logging facility. The ORION
logging facility logs all messages passing
through the operating system and stores these
messages in a log file. LOGGING keeps records
of the messages and interactions between ORION
and the system. This keyword has no arguments
or switches.
OUTPUT-DISPLAY enables the display of specified types of
messages on your terminal. The message types
are the arguments and switches to this
keyword.
QUEUE-REQUESTS enables all users to make queue requests.
With queue requests enabled, a user can submit
a batch or card reader job, a card-punch,
paper-tape-punch, plotter, or a printer
request to the system. This keyword has no
arguments or switches.
TIMESHARING enables timesharing after a KSYS has occurred.
To cancel a pending KSYS event, use the CANCEL
EVENT-REQUEST command. For information about
setting the KSYS time, see the SET KSYS
command.
STRUCTURE-RECOGNITION
automatically mounts and makes accessible to
users the following structures:
o spinning structures with volume
recognition enabled
o forcibly RECOGNIZED structures
The ENABLE STRUCTURE-RECOGNITION command
affects all structures to be mounted.
VOLUME-RECOGNITION
enables volume recognition for tapes and disk
packs. Volume recognition allows you to mount
labeled tapes and structures on tape/disk
drives without having to identify the tape or
structure to the system with the RECOGNIZE
command. (See the RECOGNIZE command.)
2-36
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
ENABLE
JOB-SCHEDULING Arguments
ALL-CPUs allows all available CPUs to schedule jobs.
ONLY CPUn allows only the specified CPU to schedule
jobs, and disables all currently enabled CPUs.
(n = CPU number)
CPUn allows the specified CPU to schedule jobs.
(n = CPU number)
OUTPUT-DISPLAY Arguments
ALL-MESSAGES displays all operator, system, user, and error
messages on your OPR terminal. ALL-MESSAGES
is the default.
BATCH-MESSAGES displays messages generated during batch job
processing.
CARD-PUNCH-MESSAGES
displays messages generated by card-punch
jobs.
CARD-READER-INTERPRETER-MESSAGES
displays messages generated by card reader
jobs or batch jobs submitted with the /READER
switch.
CATALOG-MESSAGES displays messages generated by changes to the
system catalog.
CONFIG-MESSAGES displays messages generated by changes to the
system configuration.
EVENT-MESSAGES displays messages generated by special events
such as billing file closure, ORION log file
closure, scheduled system shutdown, or Usage
accounting file closure. See the SHOW QUEUES
EVENTS command for more information on these
event types.
FAL-MESSAGES displays messages generated during network
file access requests.
LCP-MESSAGES displays messages generated by the LAT Control
Program.
MOUNT-MESSAGES displays messages generated when users request
tape and structure mounts and dismounts.
2-37
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
ENABLE
NCP-MESSAGES displays messages generated by the DECnet
Network Control Program.
PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH-MESSAGES
displays messages generated by
paper-tape-punch jobs.
PLOTTER-MESSAGES displays messages generated by plotter jobs.
PRINTER-MESSAGES displays messages generated by line printer
jobs.
QUOTA-MESSAGES displays messages generated by changes to the
system catalogs.
READER-MESSAGES displays messages generated by card reader
jobs.
USER-MESSAGES displays messages generated when users make
requests to you through the PLEASE program.
QUEUES Arguments
ALL-INPUT-OUTPUT enables all batch, card-punch,
paper-tape-punch, plotter, and printer queue
requests.
BATCH enables all batch queue requests.
CARD-PUNCH enables all card-punch queue requests.
PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH enables all paper-tape-punch queue requests.
PLOTTER enables all plotter queue requests.
PRINTER enables all printer queue requests.
VOLUME-RECOGNITION Arguments
DISK-DRIVES enables volume recognition on all disk drives.
TAPE-DRIVES enables volume recognition on tape drives.
disk-drive-name: enables volume recognition on the specified
disk drive. You must include the colon. The
name is in the format xxcn:, where xx
represents the device type (RP for RP04 or
RP07, and RN for RP20); c represents the disk
controller identification; and n is the disk
drive number.
2-38
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
ENABLE
tape-drive-name: enables volume recognition on the specified
tape drive. You must include the colon. The
name is in the format MTxn:, where x is the
tape controller identification and n is the
tape drive number.
OUTPUT-DISPLAY Switches
/INFORMATION-MESSAGES
displays informational messages such as errors
that occur due to an application problem.
Messages that require no operator response are
considered informational messages.
/JOB-MESSAGES displays messages that notify you when a
device or stream begins or ends processing a
job request.
/OPR-ACTION-MESSAGES
displays messages that notify you of action to
be performed as requested by a user or a
processing job. Messages that require a
response, such as PLEASE messages, will be
displayed.
If you do not specify one of these switches,
all three types of messages are assumed by
default.
Examples
1. You have previously disabled queue requests to allow those
requests in the queues to be processed before a shift
turnover. You can now enable queue requests.
OPR>ENABLE QUEUES<RET>
OPR>
16:34:03 -- System Queue's Entry Processing Enabled --
OPR>
2-39
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
ENABLE
2. You have started OPR on a terminal to display only mount
messages. By default, when OPR is started, all messages are
displayed. Therefore, you must disable all messages and then
enable mount messages.
.R OPR<RET>
OPR>DISABLE OUTPUT-DISPLAY ALL-MESSAGES<RET>
OPR>
08:45:18 -- OUTPUT-DISPLAY of OPR Modified --
OPR>ENABLE OUTPUT-DISPLAY MOUNT-MESSAGES<RET>
OPR>
08:45:47 -- OUTPUT-DISPLAY of OPR Modified --
OPR>
3. You ENABLE volume recognition on tape drive MTA2: after you
have disabled volume recognition and initialized some scratch
tapes.
OPR>ENABLE VOLUME-RECOGNITION MTA2:<RET>
OPR>
15:45:12 Device MTA2 -- Volume Recognition is Enabled --
OPR>
4. Use the ENABLE JOB-SCHEDULING command to enable CPU1 to
schedule jobs.
OPR>ENABLE JOB-SCHEDULING CPU1<RET>
OPR>
15:54:23 -- Job Scheduling Enabled for Specified CPU(s) --
OPR>
2-40
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
ENTER
2.13 ENTER
Function
The ENTER command allows you to work with the following command
subsets:
o CATALOG
o CONFIG
o LCP (LAT Control Program)
o NCP (Network Control Program)
o QUOTA
Each of the above has its own set of commands. For more
information about these command subsets see Chapter 3. If you
are unfamiliar with a command subset, do not attempt to use it
until you have read the appropriate section of Chapter 3.
To exit from a command subset use either the RETURN or EXIT
commands. The RETURN command returns your job to OPR command
level. The EXIT command returns your job to monitor command
level.
Format
OPR>ENTER keyword<RET>
Keywords
CATALOG enters the CATALOG command subset.
CONFIG enters the CONFIG command subset.
LCP enters the LCP command subset.
NCP enters the NCP command subset.
QUOTA enters the QUOTA command subset.
2-41
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
ENTER
Examples
1. Type CATALOG to enter the CATALOG command subset.
OPR>ENTER CATALOG<RET>
CATALOG>
2. Type RETURN to return to OPR command level
CATALOG>RETURN<RET>
OPR>
2-42
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
EXIT
2.14 EXIT
Function
The EXIT command allows you to exit OPR command level and return
to monitor command level.
To return to OPR command level, you can use the monitor command,
CONTINUE, provided that you do not alter memory. See the TOPS-10
Operating System Commands Manual for more information about the
CONTINUE command.
Format
OPR>EXIT<RET>
Restriction
Because OPR takes time to respond to some commands, the immediate
action of the EXIT command may prevent you from seeing output
from previously issued commands. However, the processing of the
previous commands will not be interrupted when you EXIT from OPR.
Examples
1. Use the EXIT command to leave OPR and return to monitor
command level.
OPR>EXIT<RET>
.
2. After completing your task with commands that do not alter
memory, use the monitor command CONTINUE to return to OPR.
.CONTINUE <RET>
OPR>
2-43
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
FORWARDSPACE
2.15 FORWARDSPACE
Function
The FORWARDSPACE command spaces the print file on the line
printer in a forward direction, so that you can skip the printing
of a job, file, or page(s). The FORWARDSPACE command allows you
to forwardspace the print file so that you can save paper and
print only what is needed as output.
You may have to forwardspace a particular file that is currently
printing on the line printer if, for example, a user requires
only a portion of some printed output.
Format
OPR>FORWARDSPACE keyword nn /switch<RET>
Keyword
PRINTER nn specifies the line printer (output device) and
unit number to forwardspace the forms
currently printing (for example, PRINTER 0 for
LPT0, PRINTER 1 for LPT1, and so forth). You
must specify the PRINTER keyword and unit
number.
Switches
/NODE:identifier specifies the name of a node in the network.
It identifies a remote node for which the
command should be effective. For example, to
specify the node named KL1026, use
/NODE:KL1026. If you do not specify a node
identifier, your own node is the default.
2-44
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
FORWARDSPACE
You must specify one of the following switches:
/COPIES:nnnn specifies the number of copies to be skipped
over printing. The number you specify is
subtracted from the number that was queued
with the PRINT command. For example, if a
user issued the command:
PRINT FOO.BAR/COPIES:25
and you issue the FORWARDSPACE command with
/COPIES:10 while FOO.BAR is printing on the
line printer, the total number of copies
printed will be 15.
/FILE specifies to forwardspace one file when a
multifile PRINT request has been given by a
user. For example, if a user issues the
command:
PRINT FOO1.BAR,FOO2.BAR,FOO3.BAR
and you issue the FORWARDSPACE command with
/FILE while FOO1.BAR is printing on the line
printer, FOO2.BAR starts printing on the line
printer. The remaining pages of FOO1.BAR are
skipped.
/PAGES:nnnn specifies the number of pages to be
forwardspaced for the file that is currently
being printed. If you do not specify either
the /COPIES or the /FILE switch, then you must
specify the /PAGES switch. The number you
specify (nnnn) refers to the physical number
of pages and not to the number of disk pages
used to store the file.
Examples
1. Specify line printer 0 for the FORWARDSPACE command to skip
15 copies of a print request of 25 copies.
OPR>FORWARDSPACE PRINTER 0 /COPIES:15<RET>
OPR>
12:34:34 Printer 0 -- Forward Spaced 15 Copies --
OPR>
2-45
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
FORWARDSPACE
2. Specify line printer 2 with the FORWARDSPACE command to
forwardspace one file from the file currently printing.
OPR>FORWARDSPACE PRINTER 2 /FILE<RET>
OPR>
13:21:09 Printer 2 -- Forward Spaced 1 File --
OPR>
3. Use the FORWARDSPACE command to forwardspace 12 pages from
the page currently printing on line printer 1 because of a
user request.
OPR>FORWARDSPACE PRINTER 1 /PAGE:12<RET>
OPR>
10:20:30 Printer 1 -- Forward Spaced 12 Pages --
OPR>
2-46
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
HELP
2.16 HELP
Function
The HELP command prints a paragraph of text about the OPR command
you specify as the keyword to the HELP command.
Format
OPR>HELP keyword<RET>
where keyword can be any available OPR command.
Restrictions
If you specify an invalid OPR command as a keyword with the HELP
command, OPR responds with:
%No help available for "command"
You can then press <CTRL/H> or retype the HELP command and
specify a correct OPR command as a keyword with HELP.
If you do not specify any OPR command as a keyword to the HELP
command, OPR prints the text for the HELP command.
Examples
1. Use the HELP command to get more information about HELP.
OPR>HELP HELP<RET>
The HELP command allows you to display the function, format,
arguments, and switches of any OPR command.
The format is:
HELP keyword
where keyword can be any valid OPR command.
2-47
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
HELP
A list of OPR commands may be obtained by typing "?" in
response to the OPR> prompt.
OPR>? one of the following:
ABORT ALIGN BACKSPACE CANCEL CLOSE
CONTINUE DEFINE DISABLE DISMOUNT ENABLE
ENTER EXIT FORWARDSPACE HELP HOLD
IDENTIFY LOCK MODIFY MOUNT NEXT
PUSH RECOGNIZE RELEASE REPORT REQUEUE
RESPOND RESTRICT ROUTE SEND SET
SHOW SHUTDOWN START STOP SUPPRESS
TAKE UNLOCK UNRESTRICT WAIT
or one of the following:
CATALOG CONFIG LCP NCP QUOTA
OPR>
2. Use the HELP command to get information about the TAKE
command.
OPR>HELP TAKE<RET>
The TAKE command allows you to execute a series of OPR
commands from a specified command file.
The format is:
TAKE filespec
where filespec is the name of the command file,
followed by one of these optional switches:
/DISPLAY
/NODISPLAY
OPR>
2-48
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
HOLD
2.17 HOLD
Function
The HOLD command prevents specified batch or output requests from
being processed.
Use the RELEASE command to reschedule jobs that have been held
with the HOLD command.
To examine jobs waiting in a queue to be processed, use the SHOW
QUEUES command.
Format
OPR>HOLD keyword argument<RET>
Keywords
BATCH-JOBS holds one or more jobs in the batch input
queue that are waiting to be processed.
CARD-PUNCH-JOBS holds one or more jobs in the card punch
output queue that are waiting to be processed.
PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH-JOBS
holds one or more jobs in the paper-tape-punch
output queue that are waiting to be processed.
PLOTTER-JOBS holds one or more jobs in the plotter output
queue that are waiting to be processed.
PRINTER-JOBS holds one or more jobs in the line printer
output queue that are waiting to be processed.
Arguments
request-id-number holds the job specified by the
request-identification number.
[PPN] holds all jobs for a particular user. The
[PPN] (project-programmer number) identifies
the user.
* holds all types of jobs specified by the
keyword for all users.
2-49
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
HOLD
Restrictions
The HOLD command is effective only for the jobs currently waiting
to be processed. Any jobs submitted after the HOLD command was
issued are not held.
You cannot hold a job that is currently being processed in a
batch stream or on an output device. If you need to stop the job
from processing, use the STOP command. For more information, see
the STOP command description.
Examples
1. HOLD a line printer job whose request-id-number is 127. This
job will be rescheduled when you issue a RELEASE command for
this job.
OPR>HOLD PRINTER-JOBS 127<RET>
OPR>
10:54:07 -- 1 Job Held --
OPR>
2. HOLD all card-punch jobs.
OPR>HOLD CARD-PUNCH-JOBS <RET>
OPR>
11:34:35 -- 10 Jobs Held --
OPR>
3. HOLD all batch jobs for user [27,5107].
OPR>HOLD BATCH-JOBS [27,5107]<RET>
OPR>
12:20:32 -- 15 Jobs Held --
OPR>
2-50
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
IDENTIFY
2.18 IDENTIFY
Function
The IDENTIFY command allows you to service tape mount requests by
enabling you to:
o Satisfy a user tape mount request for an unlabeled tape.
o Assign a volume identification (volid) for a user who is
writing on an unlabeled or labeled tape.
When a user issues a mount request for an unlabeled tape, you
must physically locate, mount, and prepare the requested tape on
an available tape drive and then identify the tape mount request
to the tape drive.
If you have volume recognition enabled and your installation uses
labeled tapes, you do not need to use the IDENTIFY command after
you mount and ready a tape on a tape drive.
Format
OPR>IDENTIFY keyword argument<RET>
Keyword
MTxn: specifies the physical tape drive unit, where
x is the tape controller identification and n
is the tape drive number. You must specify a
colon at the end of the unit number.
Arguments
REQUEST-ID nn specifies that you are attempting to use the
tape on drive MTxn: to satisfy
tape-mount-request number nn.
VOLUME-ID volid specifies the volume identifier (volid) of the
tape volume you have mounted on the tape
drive. The volid can consist of from 1 to 6
alphanumeric characters. If the volid
contains nonalphanumeric characters
(characters other than A through Z and 0
through 9), the volid must be enclosed in
double quotes.
2-51
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
IDENTIFY
NOTE
If someone mounts a tape and you do not know its
identity, you can use the RECOGNIZE command to display
the volume identity before you issue the IDENTIFY
command. For more information, see the RECOGNIZE
command description.
Example
A user requests that you mount an unlabeled tape. After the tape
mount request appears, you mount and prepare the tape and then
identify the tape to the mount request.
OPR>
14:34:20 -- Magtape mount request #43 --
User: PERK [10,5211] job# 27
Volume-set-name: MTA-DJ7222
Volume-ID Write Labels Track Density
--------- ------- ------ ----- -------
M16Y73 Enabled No 9 1600
OPR>
14:36:12 Device MTA2 -- Unlabeled Volume Mounted --
Density 1600 BPI, Write-Enabled
OPR>IDENTIFY MTA2: REQUEST-ID 43<RET>
OPR>
14:36:15 Device MTA2 -- Volume M16Y73 Reassigned --
User: PERK [10,5211] Job# 27
OPR>
2-52
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
LOCK
2.19 LOCK
Function
The LOCK command prohibits users from accessing a disk file
structure so that you can remove the structure from the system.
If a timesharing job is accessing the structure, the job is
refused access after its current program has completed. If a
batch job is accessing the structure, the LOCK command takes
effect after the batch job is completed.
When the LOCK command takes effect, the structure is unloaded
from the disk drive.
See the UNLOCK command for information about reversing the action
of the LOCK command.
Format
OPR>LOCK arguments /switch<RET>
Arguments
structure-name: specifies a 1- to 4-character structure name
that is currently known to the system. The
structure must be mounted and on-line. The
name must end with a colon(:).
date-and-time specifies an optional date and time when the
structure will be LOCKed so that users cannot
access it. The date is in the format of
"mm-dd-yy," where mm is the month, dd is the
day, and yy is the year, separated by hyphens.
The time is in the format of "hh:mm," where hh
is the hour and mm is the minutes, separated
by a colon. The time is based on the 24-hour
clock.
2-53
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
LOCK
Switch
/NOUNLOAD specifies that the disk pack is to remain
mounted and spinning on the disk drive, but
the file structure is to be dismounted. This
switch is useful when you must perform a task
on the structure, such as refreshing it with
the ONCE program, without users accessing the
disk pack. If this switch is not specified,
the structure is unloaded (stops spinning)
from the disk drive.
Restrictions
If you specify a structure name not known to the system, you get
the following error message:
? No such device
If you specify a structure name that is currently LOCKed, you get
the following message:
hh:mm:ss --- Structure name: already LOCKed ---
If you specify an optional date without a time, the time defaults
to 00:00:00 (or the start of that date).
If you specify an optional time without a date, the date defaults
to the current date. If the time has already occurred for the
current date, the time applies to the next day.
Examples
1. Use the LOCK command to restrict all users from accessing the
structure SYS1: so that you can refresh it.
OPR>LOCK SYS1: /NOUNLOAD<RET>
OPR>
8:23:19 --- Structure SYS1 Locked ---
OPR>
2-54
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
LOCK
2. Use the LOCK command to restrict all users from accessing
DSKZ: after 5 o'clock. When you specify the date or time, no
message appears at the OPR terminal until that date or time
has occurred.
OPR>LOCK DSKZ: 3-7-88:17:00:00<RET>
OPR>
12:32:09 -- Structure DSKZ --
LOCK set for 7-Mar-88 17:00:00
OPR>
At 5 o'clock the following messages appear:
17:00:02 -- Structure DSKZ Locked --
OPR>
17:00:02 -- Structure DSKZ Dismounted --
From Unit: RPB4
OPR>
2-55
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
MODIFY
2.20 MODIFY
Function
The MODIFY command allows you to change either of the following:
o The priority of a job request waiting in a queue for
processing
o The disk unit or structure name in one of the system lists.
When you modify the priority of a job request, you change the
importance of that job request in relationship to other jobs in
the queues waiting to be processed.
When a user submits a job request for processing, its priority
number defaults to a value that is set at GALGEN time. The user
who requests the job can set the priority value with the
/PRIORITY: switch. However, the MODIFY command permits you to
override the priority value for any job request.
When you change a system list, you remove or add a disk-unit name
(or structure) to either the active-swapping list, crash-dump
list, or system-search list.
NOTE
Consult your system manager before using the
MODIFY command to change system lists. Removing
or adding a structure or disk unit to any of the
lists can greatly affect the performance of your
system.
The system lists are determined by the disk HOME blocks when the
monitor is brought up. To check the current system lists, use
the SHOW SYSTEM command.
Format
OPR>MODIFY keyword argument PRIORITY nn<RET>
Keywords
ACTIVE-SWAPPING-LIST
modifies the list of disk unit names that the
system uses to swap pages of memory.
2-56
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
MODIFY
BATCH-REQUEST modifies one or more batch job requests
waiting in the batch input queue to be
processed.
CARD-PUNCH-REQUEST modifies one or more card-punch job requests
waiting in the card-punch output queue to be
processed.
CRASH-DUMP-LIST modifies the list of structure names that the
system uses to dump (or copy) all pages of
memory during a system crash.
PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH-REQUEST
modifies one or more paper-tape-punch job
requests waiting in the paper-tape-punch
output queue to be processed.
PLOTTER-REQUEST modifies one or more plotter job requests
waiting in the plotter output queue to be
processed.
PRINTER-REQUEST modifies one or more line-printer job requests
waiting in the line-printer output queue to be
processed.
SYSTEM-SEARCH-LIST modifies the list of structure names that the
system uses to search for file structures and
file names.
Arguments
request-id-number modifies a single request from a particular
user, as specified by the appropriate keyword.
[PPN] modifies all jobs as specified by the
appropriate keyword for a particular user.
The [PPN] (project-programmer number)
identifies the user.
* modifies all requests from all users as
specified by the keyword.
PRIORITY nn modifies the priority number (nn) that the
request(s) will be set to. The number can be
in the range from 1 to 63. The higher the
number is, the greater the importance of the
request. You must specify the word
"PRIORITY."
2-57
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
MODIFY
EXCLUDE specifies the name of a disk unit (or
structure) that is to be removed from one of
the above system lists.
INCLUDE specifies the name of a disk unit (or
structure) that is to be added to one of the
above system lists.
disk-unit-name: specifies the name of the disk unit to be
excluded or included in the active-swapping
list. The disk unit name can be from 1 to 4
alphanumeric characters in length, followed by
a colon.
structure: specifies the name of the file structure to be
excluded or included in either the crash-dump
list or the system-search list. The structure
name can be from 1 to 4 alphanumeric
characters in length, followed by a colon.
The structure must be mounted before you use
the MODIFY command.
Restriction
You cannot MODIFY the priority of a job request once it has begun
to process in a batch stream or on an output device.
If you attempt to exclude or include a disk unit (or structure)
name that has not been recognized by the system, you get the
following error message:
? Unknown device: "device"
If you specify a disk unit (or structure) that is already
included in the system list, you get the following error message:
hh:mm:ss Device "str" -- Is already in "system" list --
where str is the disk unit name (or structure name) and system is
the name of the system list.
Examples
1. Modify a printer request so that its priority will be greater
than the next request to be printed. Thus, if print request
13 was the next print request and you modify print request 15
to be 50, print request 15 prints before print request 13.
OPR>MODIFY PRINTER-REQUEST 15 PRIORITY 50<RET>
OPR>
13:54:19 -- 1 Job Modified --
OPR>
2-58
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
MODIFY
2. Modify all card-punch requests for user [27,3223] so that
these requests will be output on the card punch before any
other card-punch requests.
OPR>MODIFY CARD-PUNCH-REQUEST [27,3223] PRIORITY 63<RET>
OPR>
16:13:20 -- 8 Jobs Modified --
OPR>
3. You have been instructed by your system manager to remove
OPR1: from the system-search list and to add OPR2: to the
system-search list.
OPR>MODIFY SYSTEM-SEARCH-LIST EXCLUDE OPR1<RET>
OPR>
09:31:57 Device OPR1 -- Removed from System Search List --
OPR>MODIFY SYSTEM-SEARCH-LIST INCLUDE OPR2:<RET>
OPR>
09:32:15 Device OPR2 -- Added to System Search List --
OPR>
2-59
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
MOUNT
2.21 MOUNT
Function
The MOUNT command mounts a structure and assigns it an alias name
when structure and/or volume recognition is disabled.
When both structure and volume recognition are disabled, first
mount and prepare the structure. Then use the RECOGNIZE command
to force MDA to read the HOME blocks of the structure and
recognize the volume mounted. Finally, use the MOUNT command so
that the system acknowledges the structure as mounted.
Format
OPR>MOUNT keyword arguments /switch<RET>
Keyword
STRUCTURE specifies a file structure. You must include
the keyword STRUCTURE in the MOUNT command.
Arguments
structure-name: specifies the logical identification of the
file structure you have mounted and made
ready. The structure name can be from 1 to 4
alphanumeric characters in length followed
with a colon. An example of a logical
structure name is DSKA:.
alias-name: specifies a 1-to 4-alphanumeric character name
when two file structures are of the same name.
For example, if two file structures exist as
DSKA:, the second structure could have an
alias of ADSK:.
Switches
/OVERRIDE-SET-NUMBER
specifies that the structure is always mounted
even if the disk set number is inappropriate
for the monitor.
2-60
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
MOUNT
/WRITE-LOCKED specifies a read-only state for the structure
you have mounted.
Restriction
If you have not mounted and/or prepared all structures, the
following error message occurs when you use the MOUNT command:
hh:mm:ss Device str -- Invalid Mount Request --
All Required Volumes Are Not Spinning
where str is the structure name in the MOUNT command.
Examples
1. You have structure recognition disabled and you mount and
prepare DSKZ:. When the system recognizes the volume, the
following message appears at your OPR terminal.
9:45:13 Device RPB0 --Volume DSKZ0 for structure DSKZ Mounted--
Now use the MOUNT command so that the system recognizes the
structure DSKZ: as mounted.
OPR>MOUNT STRUCTURE DSKZ:<RET>
OPR> 9:45:36 -- Structure DSKZ Mounted --
OPR>
2. You have both structure and volume recognition disabled and
you are mounting a structure of the same name as another
structure on the system.
OPR>RECOGNIZE RPB1:<RET>
OPR>
10:23:12 Device RPB1 --Volume DSKX0 for Structure DSKX Mounted--
OPR>MOUNT STRUCTURE DSKX: XDSK:<RET>
OPR>
10:23:47 -- Structure XDSK Mounted --
2-61
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
NEXT
2.22 NEXT
Function
The NEXT command allows you to specify the request that will be
serviced next in an input queue. When you use the NEXT command,
the request that you specified starts immediately after the
current request is finished.
Format
OPR>NEXT keyword nn REQUEST-ID mm /switch<RET>
Keywords
BATCH-STREAM nn specifies the batch stream in which the job
will run.
CARD-PUNCH nn specifies the card punch that will punch the
job.
PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH nn specifies the paper tape punch that will
punch the job.
PLOTTER nn specifies the plotter that will plot the job.
PRINTER nn specifies the line printer that will print
the job.
Switch
/NODE:identifier specifies the name of a node in the network.
It identifies a remote node for which the
command should be effective. For example, to
specify the node named KL1026, use
/NODE:KL1026. If you do not specify a node
identifier, your own node is the default.
2-62
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
NEXT
Example
A user (MORRILL) requests that his print job be moved to the top
of the print queue to be printed when a printer is available.
You must examine the print queue to obtain the
request-identification number for his print request. Then you
use the NEXT command to place his request next in the queue.
OPR>SHOW QUEUES PRINTER<RET>
OPR>
11:35:43 -- System Queues Listing --
Printer Queue:
Job Name Req# Limit User
-------- ------ ------- -------------------------------
* BREAK 14 200 KOVALCIN, D [10,4635] On Unit:0
MAIL 145 35 MAROTTA, M [27,555]
SNOOPY 10 65 MORRILL [42,2520] /After:29-May-88 12:00
There are 3 jobs in the queue (1 in progress)
OPR>NEXT PRINTER 0 REQUEST-ID 10<RET>
OPR>
11:36:17 Printer 0 -- NEXT request #10 scheduled --
OPR>
2-63
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
PUSH
2.23 PUSH
Function
The PUSH command enables you to enter monitor command level
without exiting the OPR program. For example, you may want to
use PUSH so that you can enter operator-privileged monitor
commands. To return to OPR, use the monitor command POP.
For more information about PUSH and POP, see the CONTEXT command
in the TOPS-10 Operating System Commands Manual.
Format
OPR>PUSH<RET>
Examples
1. Use the PUSH command to enter monitor command level so that
you can use the SYSTAT E monitor command.
OPR>PUSH<RET>
.SYSTAT E<RET>
.
2. After you use the SYSTAT E command, type POP to return to OPR
command level.
.POP<RET>
OPR>
2-64
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
RECOGNIZE
2.24 RECOGNIZE
Function
The RECOGNIZE command forces the system to read the volume labels
of a tape or structure. This command need only be used when
hardware restrictions limit the use of volume recognition. In
addition, this command is useful in the following situations:
o When a labeled tape has been mounted on a tape drive after an
unassigned labeled tape has been unloaded by pressing the
UNLOAD button on the tape drive (TU70, 71, 72, 73 only).
o When a tape is mounted on a drive which does not generate
on-line interrupts (for example, TU40).
o When VOLUME-RECOGNITION has been disabled for the tape drive
or disk drive.
Format
OPR>RECOGNIZE argument<RET>
Arguments
MTxn: specifies the tape-drive name, where x is the
tape controller identification and n is the
tape-drive number.
xxcn: specifies the disk-drive name that currently
has a disk pack mounted and ready on it. The
name is in the format of xxcn:, where xx
represents the device type (RP for RP04, RP06
and RP07, RA for RA80, RA81 and RA60, and RN
for RP20); c represents the disk controller
identification; and n is the disk-drive
number.
Restriction
If the tape drive is unavailable, you must first use the SET
TAPE-DRIVE AVAILABLE command, and then the RECOGNIZE command.
2-65
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
RECOGNIZE
If the tape volume is unlabeled and you use the RECOGNIZE
command, the following message appears:
hh:mm:ss Device MTAn -- Unlabeled Volume Mounted --
You must then use the IDENTIFY command to have the system
recognize the unlabeled tape volume to a particular tape mount
request. See the IDENTIFY command description for more
information.
Do not press the UNLOAD button on TU70 tape drives to unload and
remove a tape. Always use either the monitor command DISMOUNT or
the OPR command DISMOUNT to unload a tape from a TU70 tape drive.
Examples
1. You have volume recognition disabled on tape drive 1 (MTA1:)
and you mount a labeled tape on MTA1: in response to a user
MOUNT request. After the tape has been brought to a "ready"
state, you must use the RECOGNIZE command to have the system
recognize the labeled tape on the tape drive.
OPR>RECOGNIZE MTA1:<RET>
OPR>
12:34:12 Device MTA1 -- Volume BACKUP Reassigned --
User: BROWN,E [27,5107] Job 59
OPR>
2. If someone has mounted a disk pack on a disk drive that has
VOLUME-RECOGNITION disabled, you can use the RECOGNIZE
command to force the system to read the pack's home blocks.
OPR>RECOGNIZE RPB6:<RET.
OPR>
8:16:27 Device RPB6 --Volume GALO0 for Structure GALO Mounted--
OPR>
8:16:28 -- Structure GALO Mounted --
OPR>
2-66
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
RELEASE
2.25 RELEASE
Function
The RELEASE command releases job requests that were held with the
HOLD command or REQUEUE command. When you RELEASE a previously
held job request, the job is rescheduled for processing.
To examine jobs waiting in the queue to be processed or any jobs
being held, use the SHOW QUEUES command with the /ALL switch.
Format
OPR>RELEASE keyword argument<RET>
Keywords
BATCH-JOBS releases one or more jobs held in the batch
input queue.
CARD-PUNCH-JOBS releases one or more jobs held in the
card-punch output queue.
PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH-JOBS
releases one or more jobs held in the
paper-tape-punch output queue.
PLOTTER-JOBS releases one or more jobs held in the plotter
output queue.
PRINTER-JOBS releases one or more jobs held in the line
printer output queue.
Arguments
request-id-number releases a single job for a particular user as
specified by the request-identification
number.
[PPN] releases all types of jobs, as specified by
the appropriate keyword, for a particular
user. The [PPN] (project-programmer number)
identifies the user.
2-67
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
RELEASE
* releases all jobs held for all users as
specified by the keyword.
Examples
1. Use the RELEASE command to release a line-printer job request
for user [10,3111].
OPR>RELEASE PRINTER-JOBS [10,3111]<RET>
OPR>
14:23:45 -- 1 Job Released --
OPR>
2. Use the RELEASE command to release all card-punch job
requests held in the queue.
OPR>RELEASE CARD-PUNCH-JOBS <RET>
OPR>
15:23:01 -- 10 Jobs Released --
OPR>
3. Use the RELEASE command to release batch job request 117.
OPR>RELEASE BATCH-JOBS 117<RET>
OPR>
17:18:20 -- 1 Job Released --
OPR>
2-68
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
REPORT
2.26 REPORT
Function
The REPORT command allows you to report various comments or
existing error conditions. These reports are logged into the
system log file ERROR.SYS, thus creating a system log entry. To
list these entries, you can run the SPEAR program. (Refer to the
TOPS-10/20 SPEAR Manual for more information.)
Format
OPR>REPORT user-name argument text<RET>
Arguments
user-name specifies the name of the user making the
report to ERROR.SYS. Your project-programmer
number is automatically entered into the
system log entry. If you do not specify this
keyword, it is not entered into the system log
entry.
device specifies one of the system devices that is
the subject of the report. This keyword is
only needed if the report is about a
particular device.
text After specifying the device, you can enter a
single- or multiple-line response and confirm
with a carriage return, or you can confirm
with carriage return immediately after the
user name or device. OPR responds with ENTER
TEXT AND TERMINATE WITH ^Z. You then enter as
many lines of text for a response as you need.
When you press <CTRL/Z>, the OPR> prompt
returns and your report is logged into the
ERROR.SYS file.
2-69
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
REPORT
Examples
1. Use the REPORT command for a previous cancellation of a job
being read into the system through the card reader.
OPR>REPORT OPR CDR260: TOO MANY PICK CHECKS<RET>
OPR>
12:19:00 -- ERROR.SYS entry made by the REPORT command --
OPR>
2. Use the REPORT command to describe a possible hardware
problem that seems serious.
OPR>REPORT OPR<RET>
Enter text and terminate with ^Z
THERE WAS JUST A HEAD CRASH ON STRUCTURE MISC:<RET>
ALL FILES WILL BE RESTORED^Z
OPR>
15:18:01 -- ERROR.SYS entry made by the REPORT command --
OPR>
2-70
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
REQUEUE
2.27 REQUEUE
Function
The REQUEUE command stops a job request that is in progress, puts
the job request back in the queue in the HOLD state, and cancels
the in-progress job request. To reschedule the job, use the
RELEASE command.
Format
OPR>REQUEUE keyword nn /switch argument<RET>
Keywords
BATCH-STREAM requeues a particular batch stream that has a
job currently active within it.
CARD-PUNCH requeues a particular card-punch that has a
job currently being output on it.
PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH requeues a particular paper-tape-punch that
has a job currently being output on it.
PLOTTER requeues a particular plotter that has a job
currently being output on it.
PRINTER requeues a particular line-printer that has a
job currently printing on it.
Switches
/NODE:identifier specifies the name of a node in the network.
It identifies the remote node for which the
command is effective. For example, to specify
the node named KL1026, use /NODE:KL1026. If
you do not specify a node identifier, your own
node is the default.
2-71
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
REQUEUE
/REASON:comment allows you to include a comment explaining why
the job has been requeued. This comment
appears in the batch log file and at the
user's terminal. If the comment is longer
than one line, you can end the first line with
a hyphen and a carriage return and continue
the comment on the next line. If you press
RETURN immediately after the colon, OPR
responds with the instruction: ENTER TEXT AND
TERMINATE WITH ^Z. You can then enter as many
lines of text as necessary. When you finish
entering the text, type a <CTRL/Z> and the
OPR> prompt reappears.
Arguments
BEGINNING-OF specifies that requeuing starts at the
beginning of the COPY, FILE, or JOB. This
argument is valid when you requeue a job
currently processing on a device, such as the
line printer. This argument is invalid with
the BATCH-STREAM keyword.
COPY specifies that requeuing starts at the
beginning of the current copy being processed.
(Refer to the BACKSPACE and FORWARDSPACE
commands.)
FILE specifies that requeuing starts at the
beginning of the current file being processed.
(Refer to the BACKSPACE and FORWARDSPACE
commands.)
JOB specifies that requeuing starts at the
beginning of the current job being processed.
With JOB, the entire job is requeued.
CURRENT-POSITION specifies the current position (line number)
of the job on unit number nn at the time you
issue the REQUEUE command.
2-72
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
REQUEUE
Examples
1. Use the REQUEUE command to hold and cancel a job in batch
stream 5.
OPR>REQUEUE BATCH-STREAM 5 /REQUEST-ID:56<RET>
OPR>
10:23:56 Batch Stream 5 -- REQUEUE command queued --
Job TEST Req #56 for BROWN [27,5107]
OPR>
10:23:57 Batch Stream 5 -- End --
Job TEST Req #56 for BROWN [27,5107]
-- Job Requeued by Operator --
OPR>
2. Use the REQUEUE command to hold and cancel the current
processing job on the card punch.
OPR>REQUEUE CARD-PUNCH 0 BEGINNING-OF JOB /REASON:<RET>
Enter text and terminate with ^Z
JOB REQUEUED BECAUSE OF CARD PUNCH JAM.<RET>
FIELD SERVICE CALLED.<RET>
OPERATOR-JONES.^Z
OPR>
16:09:43 Card-punch 0 -- Requeued --
Job PUNCH9 Req #99 for HOVSEPIAN [12,345]
OPR>
16:09:44 Card-punch 0 -- End --
Job PUNCH9 Req #99 for HOVSEPIAN [12,345]
-- Job Requeued by Operator --
OPR>
3. Use the REQUEUE command to hold and cancel the current
processing job on the line printer, unit number 0, at the
current position.
OPR>REQUEUE PRINTER 0 CURRENT-POSITION<RET>
OPR>
12:34:09 Printer 0 -- Requeued --
Job BATCH1 Req #177 for HURLEY [27,5467]
OPR>
12:34:10 Printer 0 -- End --
Job BATCH1 Req #177 for HURLEY [27,5467]
-- Job Requeued by Operator --
OPR>
2-73
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
RESPOND
2.28 RESPOND
Function
The RESPOND command allows you to reply to any message sent to
you by means of WTOR (Write-To-Operator with Response) from a
user or from a batch job.
When a user or software task sends you a message that requires a
response, OPR assigns the message a number so that you can keep
track of all messages sent to operations. Use the SHOW MESSAGES
command, to display outstanding messages.
You must specify a message number with the RESPOND command.
Format
OPR>RESPOND nnn text<RET>
Keywords
nnn specifies the message number of a message that
was sent to you by means of WTOR
(Write-To-Operator with Response).
text specifies a single- or multiple-line response.
If you press carriage return immediately after
the message number, OPR responds with ENTER
TEXT AND TERMINATE WITH ^Z. You can then
enter as many lines of text as needed. To end
the text input, press <CTRL/Z> and the OPR>
prompt returns.
Examples
1. Use the RESPOND command to reply to message number 23, which
was a Page Limit Exceeded message for printer 1.
12:30:00 <23> Printer 1 -- Page Limit Exceeded --
Job OPRC Req # 147 for REILLY [30,5111]
Type 'RESPOND <Number> ABORT' to terminate the job now
Type 'RESPOND <Number> PROCEED' to allow the job to continue
printing
OPR>RESPOND 23 PROCEED<RET>
OPR>
2-74
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
RESPOND
2. Use the RESPOND command to reply to message number 67, which
was a request to remove a structure (monitor DISMOUNT
command).
13:57:01 <67> Device MISC: -- Problem removing structure --
Mount count = 1
Type 'RESPOND <number> ABORT' to not dismount Structure MISC.
Type 'RESPOND <number> PROCEED' to dismount Structure MISC
anyway.
OPR>RESPOND 67 ABORT<RET>
OPR>
13:58:31 -- Can't dismount structure OPR2 --
OPR>
3. Use the RESPOND command to reply to message number 12, which
was a user's inquiry about whether timesharing is available
after 18:00.
09:32:54 <12> -- Message from timesharing user --
User: PTAYLOR [27,6761] job# 27
WILL TIMESHARING BE AVAILABLE AFTER 18:00
OPR>RESPOND 12<RET>
Enter text and terminate with ^Z
TIMESHARING IS AVAILABLE UNTIL 23:00 TONIGHT^Z
OPR>
2-75
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
RESTRICT
2.29 RESTRICT
Function
The RESTRICT command limits the use of a specified device to the
operator. The RESTRICT command prevents non-privileged users
from mounting or assigning the device. To remove the restriction
use the UNRESTRICT command.
Format
OPR>RESTRICT argument<RET>
Argument
dev: specifies the name of the device to be
restricted.
Example
Use the RESTRICT command to restrict device MTA3.
OPR>RESTRICT MTA3:<RET>
OPR>
16:28:52 -- Device MTA3: restricted --
2-76
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
ROUTE
2.30 ROUTE
Function
The ROUTE command changes the destination of output requests, so
that the output intended for a specific unit(s) (the source
unit[s]) will automatically be output on another unit(s) (the
destination unit[s]). The source and destination units may be on
the same node, or they may be on different nodes.
This function is useful when a unit malfunctions and the output
from that device is necessary immediately.
If you are an operator at a central site, you can route output
from one unit to another, on the same or any other node.
However, output cannot be processed on another host system. If
you route output to another host node, the request(s) remain in
the queue indefinitely because the request cannot be processed.
If you are an operator at a remote node, you can route requests
from one unit to another on your node.
All device routing is entered into the system route table. You
can examine the route table with the OPR command, SHOW
ROUTE-TABLE.
To end routing and delete the entry from the system route table,
use the ROUTE command and omit the information pertaining to the
destination unit(s) and node.
Because the format and arguments used with the ROUTE command
depend largely on the keyword you use, it is highly recommended
that you use the recognition feature (<ESC>) until you feel
comfortable with the command format.
Format
OPR>ROUTE keyword source-argument destination-argument<RET>
Keywords
ALL-DEVICES specifies all device output (card-punch,
paper-tape-punch, plotter, and printer) at the
node.
CARD-PUNCH specifies card-punch output.
PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH specifies paper-tape-punch output.
2-77
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
ROUTE
PLOTTER specifies plotter output.
PRINTER specifies printer output.
Arguments (for ALL-DEVICES)
source-information
specifies the node(s) from which the output is
to be routed. The source-information for
ALL-DEVICES is specified by the node name or
by the keyword ALL-NODES.
destination-information
specifies the node(s) to which the output will
be routed. For ALL-DEVICES, the
destination-information is specified by the
node name. If you omit the
destination-information, any existing entries
in the system route table will be deleted, and
the appropriate routing will be ended.
Arguments (for keywords CARD-PUNCH
PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH
PLOTTER
PRINTER)
source-information
specifies the unit and node from which the
output will be routed. The unit number is
specified as either n (for a specific unit) or
ALL-UNITS, to designate that all output for
the appropriate device is to be routed. Note
that if you specify a unit number, only the
requests made for that specific unit (with the
/UNIT switch) will be routed. The node is
specified by the switch /NODE:name (described
below). If you omit the node specification,
the node to which you are connected is
assumed.
2-78
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
ROUTE
destination-information
specifies the unit and node to which the
output will be routed. The unit is specified
by n, the unit number, or ALL-UNITS. The node
is specified by the switch /NODE:name, which
is described below. If you omit the /NODE
switch, the node to which you are connected is
assumed.
Switch
/NODE:name specifies the name of a node in the network.
It identifies a remote node for which the
command should be effective. For example, to
specify the node named KL1026, use
/NODE:KL1026. If you do not specify a node
identifier, your own node is the default.
Restrictions
You cannot route output from ALL-UNITS to a specific unit number.
If you type this command, the following error occurs:
OPR>ROUTE PRINTER ALL-UNITS/NODE:KL1026 0/NODE:DN200<RET>
OPR>
15:15:36 -- Cannot Route a Generic Unit --
OPR>
This error is produced to prevent output from being processed on
a unit that does not have certain necessary characteristics. For
example, if printer 0 at DN200 does not have lowercase
capability, and if the requests being routed require a printer
with lowercase capability, then the requests cannot be processed
on printer 0 at DN200.
Examples
1. To route the output that is destined for printer unit 0 to
printer unit 1, on the same node, use the following command:
OPR>ROUTE PRINTER 0 1<RET>
OPR>
15:33:12 -- Printer 0 [KL1026] Routed to Printer 1 [KL1026] --
OPR>
2-79
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
ROUTE
2. To end the routing for printer 0 and to delete the entry from
the routing table, use the following command:
OPR>ROUTE PRINTER 0<RET>
OPR>
15:40:10 -- Routing for Printer 0 [KL1026] Deleted --
OPR>
3. To route all the output that is going to node DN200 to node
KL1026, use the following command:
OPR>ROUTE ALL-DEVICES DN200 KL1026<RET>
OPR>
15:43:08 -- Node DN200 Routed to KL1026 --
OPR>
2-80
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SEND
2.31 SEND
Function
The SEND command sends single- or multiple-line messages to a
specific destination as defined by the keyword. The SEND command
allows you to specify a one-line message terminated with a
carriage return or a multiple-line message terminated with a
<CTRL/Z>.
If you specify SEND ALL, you can send only a single-line message.
Format
OPR>SEND keyword nn message<RET>
Keywords
ALL sends a message to all terminals on the
system. If you specify the ALL keyword with
the /NODE switch, all terminals for that node
receive the text. You can send only
single-line messages when you specify ALL.
BATCH-STREAM sends a message to a particular batch job or
over an IBM emulation node to a remote IBM
host. You must specify stream number with
this keyword.
JOB sends a message to a particular job that is
currently processing under timesharing or
within the batch system. You must supply a
job number with this keyword.
OPERATOR sends a message to another operator at another
node with the /NODE switch. If you do not
specify the /NODE switch, the message is sent
to all operators at all nodes.
TERMINAL sends a message to a particular logged-in
terminal. You must supply the terminal number
with this keyword.
2-81
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SEND
Switch
/NODE:identifier specifies the name of a node in the network.
It identifies a remote node for which the
command should be effective. For example, to
specify the node named KL1026, use
/NODE:KL1026. If you do not specify a node
identifier, your own node is the default.
Examples
1. Use the SEND command to notify all users that timesharing
ends in 30 minutes.
OPR>SEND ALL TIMESHARING ENDS IN 30 MINUTES<RET>
OPR>
;;SYSTEM: - TIMESHARING ENDS IN 30 MINUTES
<RET>
OPR>
2. Use the SEND command to notify all operators that a new
stand-alone schedule has been posted.
OPR>SEND OPERATOR NEW STAND-ALONE SCHEDULE IS POSTED<RET>
OPR>
12:05:35 From Operator Terminal 1:
=>NEW STAND-ALONE SCHEDULE IS POSTED
OPR>
3. Use the SEND command to notify job 32 to stop queueing print
requests because of a problem with the line printer at the
central site.
OPR>SEND JOB 32 DO NOT QUEUE ANY PRINT JOBS UNTIL NOTIFIED<RET>
OPR>
10:39:05 -- SEND Command Completed --
OPR>
2-82
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SET
2.32 SET
Function
The SET command sets parameters for system devices and features.
The SET command is useful in the SYSTEM.CMD file for system
start-up, and it can be used during normal system operation as
well.
Because the SET command is complex, the arguments and switches
for each keyword are described in the following sections.
Format
OPR>SET keyword arguments /switches<RET>
Keywords
BATCH-STREAM
CARD-PUNCH
FAL-STREAM
JOB
NODE
NQC-STREAM
PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH
PLOTTER
PRINTER
SYSTEM
TAPE-DRIVE
TERMINAL
USAGE
2-83
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SET BATCH-STREAM
2.33 SET BATCH-STREAM
Function
The SET BATCH-STREAM command sets the characteristics of a
particular stream or a range of streams. These characteristics
remain in effect until you reissue the SET BATCH-STREAM command.
Format
OPR>SET BATCH-STREAM nn /switch argument<RET>
Arguments
nn specifies a batch-stream number. The number
is usually from 0 to 5, but can be larger if
your installation uses additional batch
streams.
n:m specifies a range of batch streams. You must
include a stream number or range of stream
numbers with the SET BATCH-STREAM command.
ATTRIBUTE specifies whether the batch stream operates
with the BATCON or the SITGO program.
BATCON specifies that the batch stream is to use the
BATCON controller. (This is the system
default batch controller.)
SITGO specifies the SITGO batch processor, which
consists of a fast FORTRAN compiler for
compiling FORTRAN programs in a batch stream.
MEMORY-LIMITS nn
n:m
specifies the maximum number of memory pages
allowed for a batch stream or a range of batch
streams. If you specify a range with this
keyword, the range is from a minimum number of
memory pages to a maximum number of memory
pages.
2-84
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SET BATCH-STREAM
NOOPR-INTERVENTION
specifies that a user cannot make any requests
in the batch job that require you to perform
an action of some kind or require you to send
a message. If a batch job has
NOOPR-INTERVENTION set, any messages it sends
are ignored, and you are not asked to perform
any action.
For example, If the batch job requests
mountable devices, and if the job must wait
until the device is mounted, an error message
results.
OPR-INTERVENTION specifies that the user can pass messages to
you and that you are available to perform
actions that a user or batch job requests.
PRIORITY-LIMITS nn
n:m
specifies the priority limits of a batch
stream or a range of batch streams at the
central site or at a node. The numeric value
associated with this argument means that only
batch jobs submitted by users with the
/PRIORITY: switch specifying the number (or
range) you set for the batch stream can
execute in that stream. The numeric value for
the PRIORITY-LIMITS argument can be from 1 to
63. The higher the number, the higher the
priority.
SYSTEM-OPR-INTERVENTION
specifies that batch streams assume the
OPR-INTERVENTION state when SET SYSTEM
SCHEDULE 400 (no operator coverage) has been
specified and assume the NOOPR-INTERVENTION
state when SET SYSTEM SCHEDULE is not 400.
2-85
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SET BATCH-STREAM
TIME-LIMITS nn
n:m
specifies the maximum execution time limit for
a given batch stream or a range of batch
streams. When a batch job enters a batch
stream, it receives a default execution time,
such as five minutes. If the job exceeds this
time limit, and if the user who submitted the
batch job set up his control file to handle
time limits, the batch system gives the job an
additional 10% of the allocated time. If the
job exceeds this additional 10%, the job is
canceled. The TIME-LIMITS argument allows you
to specify that batch jobs that are set to run
a certain length of time will run in the
specified batch-stream number (or range). The
numeric value for the TIME-LIMITS argument can
be from 0 to 99999, representing minutes.
Switch
/NODE:identifier specifies the name of a node in the network.
It identifies a remote node for which the
command should be effective. For example, to
specify the node named KL1026, use
/NODE:KL1026. If you do not specify a node
identifier, your own node is the default.
Examples
1. Use the SET BATCH-STREAM command to set stream number 3 to
have a priority limit of 63.
OPR>SET BATCH-STREAM 3 PRIORITY-LIMITS 63<RET>
OPR>
13:20:54 Batch-stream 3 -- Set Accepted --
OPR>
2-86
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SET BATCH-STREAM
2. Use the SET BATCH-STREAM command to set streams 0 through 2
for no operator intervention.
OPR>SET BATCH-STREAM 0:2 NOOPR-INTERVENTION<RET>
OPR>
16:11:17 Batch-stream 0 -- Set Accepted --
OPR>
16:11:21 Batch-stream 1 -- Set Accepted --
OPR>
16:11:24 Batch-stream 2 -- Set Accepted --
OPR>
2-87
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SET CARD-PUNCH
2.34 SET CARD-PUNCH
Function
The SET CARD-PUNCH command enables you to specify the kind of
jobs to schedule on this device. You can set the form type,
output limits (maximum number of cards), priority limits, and the
action to be taken when a job exceeds the output limit that the
user specifies. This command allows you to change the parameters
that are set at GALGEN time. You must supply a unit number or a
range of unit numbers with this command.
The card-punch device handles standard 12-row, 80-column cards.
The defaults for the card punch are set by your system manager at
software-installation time through the generation of the
SYS:SPFORM.INI file.
Format
OPR>SET CARD-PUNCH nn /switch argument<RET>
Arguments
nn specifies a card-punch unit number. The
number is usually from 0 to 5, but can be
larger if your installation uses more
card-punch devices.
n:m specifies a range of card-punch unit numbers.
FORMS-TYPE name specifies the type of card-punch forms. By
setting the FORMS-TYPE, you are specifying the
type of forms in the card punch.
2-88
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SET CARD-PUNCH
LIMIT-EXCEEDED-ACTION word
specifies what action, if any, should be taken
if a card-punch job that is currently punching
exceeds the set limit of output. (The limit
is set by the user with /LIMIT.) There are
three possible actions associated with the
LIMIT-EXCEEDED-ACTION argument. They are:
ASK specifies that you be asked what to do if the
card-punch job exceeds the card limit on
output. You then have the option to continue
or abort the card-punch job. This is the
default.
ABORT specifies that the card-punch job is
automatically canceled when the limit has been
exceeded.
PROCEED specifies that the card-punch job continues
automatically and the limit is ignored.
OUTPUT-LIMITS cards
specifies the maximum card limit for punched
output. This argument can also specify a
range of card limits. The card limit refers
to the number of output cards that are
punched. This command restricts the size of
jobs that can start on the card punch you
specify.
PRIORITY-LIMITS nn
specifies the priority limits (numeric
importance) of a card punch or a range of card
punches at the central site or at a node. The
numeric value associated with this argument
means that only card-punch jobs submitted by
users with the /PRIORITY switch specifying a
number in the range you set for the card punch
can execute on that card punch. The numeric
value for the PRIORITY-LIMITS argument can be
from 1 to 63. The higher the number, the
higher the priority.
2-89
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SET CARD-PUNCH
Switch
/NODE:identifier specifies the name of a node in the network.
It identifies a remote node for which the
command should be effective. For example, to
specify the node named KL1026, use
/NODE:KL1026. If you do not specify a node
identifier, your own node is the default.
Examples
1. Use the SET CARD-PUNCH command to set the forms type to 5081
for all card-punch devices at your installation.
OPR>SET CARD-PUNCH 0:2 FORMS-TYPE 5081<RET>
OPR>
10:13:17 Card-Punch 0 -- Set Accepted --
OPR>
10:13:20 Card-Punch 1 -- Set Accepted --
OPR>
10:13:23 Card-Punch 2 -- Set Accepted --
OPR>
2. Use the SET CARD-PUNCH command to set all card-punch jobs for
a maximum output limit of 200 cards per job. Any jobs with
limits higher than 200 cards will not be started.
OPR>SET CARD-PUNCH 0:2 OUTPUT-LIMIT 200<RET>
OPR>
10:30:16 Card-Punch 0 -- Set Accepted --
OPR>
10:30:19 Card-Punch 1 -- Set Accepted --
OPR>
10:30:22 Card-Punch 2 -- Set Accepted --
OPR>
2-90
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SET FAL-STREAM
2.35 SET FAL-STREAM
Function
The SET FAL-STREAM command specifies the network type associated
with a specified FAL stream. ANF-10 is initially assumed.
Format
OPR>SET FAL-STREAM nn NETWORK argument<RET>
nn is a stream number or range of stream numbers
Arguments
ANF-10 specifies that the given FAL stream will
perform input/output with ANF-10 network
nodes.
DECnet specifies that the given FAL stream will
perform input/output with DECnet network
nodes.
Examples
1. Use the SET FAL-STREAM command to set DECnet as the type of
network connection accepted by FAL stream 2.
OPR>SET FAL-STREAM 2 NETWORK DECNET<RET>
OPR>
16:10:48 Fal-Stream 2 -- Set Acccepted --
OPR>
2. Use the SET FAL-STREAM command to set ANF-10 as the type of
network connection accepted by FAL stream 0.
OPR>SET FAL-STREAM 0 NETWORK ANF-10<RET>
OPR>
16:11:22 Fal-Stream 2 -- Set Accepted --
OPR>
2-91
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SET JOB
2.36 SET JOB
Function
The SET JOB command allows you to set the characteristics for a
particular batch job number. You can set the job for operator
intervention allowed or for no operator intervention allowed.
You must include the job number with this command.
Format
OPR>SET JOB nn argument<RET>
Arguments
nn specifies a job number currently in the
system. The numeric value can be from 0 to
99999.
NOOPR-INTERVENTION prohibits the user associated with the job
from making requests that require operator
response. If the job has a NOOPR-INTERVENTION
setting, the messages are ignored; you are not
to be asked to perform any action.
OPR-INTERVENTION allows the user associated with the specified
job number to pass messages to you to which
you must respond. This is the default.
Examples
1. Use the SET JOB command to allow operator intervention for
job number 100.
OPR>SET JOB 100 OPR-INTERVENTION<RET>
OPR>
15:55:15 Job 100 -- Modified --
OPR>
2-92
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SET JOB
2. Use the SET JOB command to not allow operator intervention
for job number 50.
OPR>SET JOB 50 NOOPR-INTERVENTION<RET>
OPR>
16:43:34 Job 50 -- Modified --
OPR>
2-93
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SET KSYS
2.37 SET KSYS
Function
The SET KSYS command sets a time for timesharing to end. You may
need to stop timesharing so that maintenance or stand-alone tasks
can be performed.
The SHOW QUEUES EVENTS command displays the KSYS time, as well as
the reason that timesharing is scheduled to end. See the SHOW
QUEUES command for information on listing the event queue.
Format
OPR>SET KSYS keyword /switch<RET>
Keywords
NOW specifies that timesharing will end
immediately.
+hh:mm:ss specifies when timesharing will end,
designated as the number of hours, minutes,
and seconds from the current time. The time
must be at least five minutes from the current
time.
hh:mm:ss specifies that timesharing will end at the
time you enter for hh:mm:ss
dd-mmm-yy:hh:mm:ss
specifies that timesharing will end on the
day, month, year, and time that you enter.
DAILY hh:mm:ss specifies that timesharing will end every day
at the time you enter.
EVERY "day" hh:mm:ss
specifies that timesharing will end every week
on the day and time that you enter. "Day"
specifies a particular day of the week.
2-94
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SET KSYS
NOTE
You can specify seconds in the SET
KSYS time, but OPR ignores this value
and executes the KSYS event to the
nearest minute of the time you
specify.
Switches
/CM specifies corrective maintenance as the reason
that timesharing will end.
/FAILSOFT writes the KSYS event queue entry time to
disk, thus preserving the KSYS time across
system reloads.
/FILE:filespec specifies the name of a file for ORION to
process when timesharing ends.
/NEW specifies a new monitor as the reason that
timesharing will end.
/PM specifies preventative maintenance as the
reason that timesharing will end.
/SA specifies stand-alone time as the reason that
timesharing will end.
/SCHED specifies scheduled system shutdown as the
reason that timesharing will end.
/REASON:comment enables you to specify other reasons that
timesharing will end.
NOTE
The above switches are displayed in
the EVENT QUEUE and are included in
the first and last KSYS warning
message sent to users.
2-95
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SET KSYS
Restriction
To set a KSYS time that is less than one hour from the current
time, you must specify the time in hours and minutes. For
example, to SET KSYS for five minutes from the current time, you
must use the form:
SET KSYS +0:05
SET KSYS +5 sets the KSYS time for 5 hours from the current time.
Example
Set the KSYS time to midnight for 21-Nov-84.
OPR>SET KSYS 21-NOV-88:00:00:00<RET>
OPR>
16:24:21 -- Event job KSYS queued, request 53 --
OPR>
Display the event queue to check the pending KSYS time.
OPR>SHOW QUEUES EVENTS<RET>
OPR>
16:25:37 -- System Queues Listing --
Event Queue:
Type Req# Expiration Description
-------- ------ ------------------ -----------------------
BILCLS 24 19-Nov-88 16:59:59 Prime time rates end
USGFIL 44 19-Nov-88 23:59:30 Usage file closure
OPRFIL 38 20-Nov-88 0:00:00 ORION log file closure
BILCLS 15 20-Nov-88 7:59:59 Discount rates end
* KSYS 53 21-Nov-88 0:00:00
There are 4 events in the queue (1 in progress)
2-96
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SET NODE
2.38 SET NODE
Function
The SET NODE command applies only if your installation has IBM
Communications software.
The SET NODE command allows you to specify the modem-related and
data-transfer-related parameters for IBM Communications nodes
that perform IBM communications. Before you set the parameters
for a node, you must define the node name, type, and mode with
the DEFINE command.
Format
OPR>SET NODE keyword arguments<RET>
where keyword
specifies the node name of the remote station for IBM
communications. The name can be from one to six
alphanumeric characters long.
Arguments
BYTES-PER-MESSAGE b
specifies the number of bytes per message, b, that the
front end uses to communicate with the remote site.
CLEAR-SEND-DELAY d
specifies a clear-to-send delay, where d is an
arbitrary number of clock ticks used by the front end.
This value is not an element of a discrete set. It can
be any positive integer value.
2-97
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SET NODE
RECORDS-PER-MESSAGE r
specifies the number of records per message, where r
can equal any positive integer. The defaults of r are:
0 for unlimited number of records (the default for HASP
and 3780)
2 for a 2780 unit with no multirecord feature
7 for a unit like an IBM 2780 with the multirecord
feature (the default for 2780)
TIMEOUT-CATEGORY P/S
specifies the timeout category where you specify either
P or S. P represents PRIMARY and S represents
SECONDARY. Timeout category is used by the BSC
protocol to determine how connecting systems bid for
use of the line. Two systems bidding for the use of a
line may not be in the same timeout category, since
this condition can result in simultaneous bids for a
line, which causes a deadlock. To prevent this, one
system is placed in the PRIMARY (P) category and the
other in the SECONDARY (S) category. For emulation,
the timeout category is normally SECONDARY. For
termination, the timeout category is normally PRIMARY.
TRANSPARENCY ON/OFF
specifies a transmission mode where the recognition of
most control characters is suppressed (TRANSPARENCY
ON). The argument can be specified only when using
HASP. The default TRANSPARENCY is OFF.
Example
Specify the SET NODE command to set the clear-to-send delay of 3
for node IBM1.
OPR>SET NODE IBM1 CLEAR-SEND-DELAY 3<RET>
OPR>
17:23:45 -- Set for Node IBM1 Accepted --
OPR>
2-98
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SET NQC-STREAM
2.39 SET NQC-STREAM
Function
The SET NQC-STREAM command specifies a node or attribute
associated with a specified NQC stream or range of NQC streams.
Format
OPR>SET NQC-STREAM nn keyword argument /switch<RET>
nn is a stream number or range of stream numbers
Keyword
ATTRIBUTE specifies characteristics of a given NQC
stream.
Argument
OUTPUT-STREAM specifies that the given NQC stream will
transmit output jobs to remote nodes. This is
the default.
Switch
/NODE:identifier specifies the name of a node in the network.
It identifies a remote node for which the
command should be effective. For example, to
specify the node named KL1026, use
/NODE:KL1026. If you do not specify a node
identifier, your own node is the default.
Example
Use the SET NQC-STREAM command to specify the OUTPUT-STREAM
attribute to NQC stream 0.
OPR>SET NQC-STREAM 0 ATTRIBUTE OUTPUT-STREAM<RET>
OPR>
16:10:48 NQC-Stream 0 -- Set Acccepted --
OPR>
2-99
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SET PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH
2.40 SET PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH
Function
The SET PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH command specifies the kind of jobs to be
scheduled on this device. You can set the forms type, output
limits (in number of feet of paper tape), priority limits, and
the action to be taken when a job exceeds its output limit. This
command allows you to change the parameters that are set at
GALGEN time. You must specify a specific unit number or a range
of unit numbers.
The defaults for the paper-tape punch are set by your system
manager at software-installation time through the generation of
the SYS:SPFORM.INI file. These defaults are usually referred to
as NORMAL in most installations.
Format
OPR>SET PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH nn /switch argument<RET>
Arguments
nn specifies a paper-tape-punch unit number. The
number is usually from 0 to 5, but can be
larger if your installation has more
paper-tape-punch devices.
n:m specifies a range of paper-tape punches.
FORMS-TYPE name specifies the name of the type of paper-tape
forms. Typically, the normal paper-tape form
is 1-inch wide fan-fold, and is referred to as
1WFF or NORMAL. Your installation can have
different form names for different types of
paper tape.
2-100
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SET PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH
LIMIT-EXCEEDED-ACTION word
specifies what action, if any, should be taken
if a paper-tape job that is currently punching
exceeds its limit of output. (The limit is
set by the user with the /LIMIT switch.) There
are three possible actions associated with the
LIMIT-EXCEEDED-ACTION argument. They are:
ASK specifies that you be asked what to do if the
paper-tape job exceeds the fold limit on
output. You then have the option to continue
or abort the paper-tape job.
ABORT specifies that the paper-tape job be
automatically canceled when the limit has been
exceeded.
PROCEED specifies that the paper-tape job continue
automatically and the output limit be ignored.
OUTPUT-LIMITS feet
specifies the maximum number of feet of
punched paper-tape output for jobs on the
specified paper tape punch device. This
command restricts the size of jobs that are
sent to the specified paper-tape punch.
PRIORITY-LIMITS nn
specifies the priority limits (numeric
importance) of a paper-tape punch or a range
of paper-tape punches at the central site or
at a node. The numeric value associated with
this argument means that only paper-tape jobs
submitted by users with the /PRIORITY switch
specifying a number within the range you set
for the paper-tape punch can be output on that
paper-tape punch. The numeric value for the
PRIORITY-LIMITS argument can be from 1 to 63.
The higher the number, the higher the
priority.
2-101
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SET PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH
Switch
/NODE:identifier specifies the name of a node in the network.
It identifies a remote node for which the
command should be effective. For example, to
specify the node named KL1026, use
/NODE:KL1026. If you do not specify a node
identifier, your own node is the default.
Examples
1. Use the SET PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH command to set the default form
type to 1WFF for a paper-tape-punch device at your
installation.
OPR>SET PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH 0 FORMS-TYPE 1WFF<RET>
OPR>
12:45:09 Papertape 0 -- Set Accepted --
OPR>
2. Use the SET PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH command to set all
paper-tape-punch jobs for a maximum output limit of 25 folds
per job. Jobs that require more than 25 folds will not be
started.
OPR>SET PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH 0:1 OUTPUT-LIMIT 25<RET>
OPR>
13:45:07 Papertape 0 -- Set Accepted --
OPR>
2-102
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SET PLOTTER
2.41 SET PLOTTER
Function
The SET PLOTTER command specifies the kind of jobs to be
scheduled on this device. You can set the forms type, output
limits (step limits), priority limits, and the action to be taken
when a job exceeds its output limit. This command allows you to
change the parameters that are set at GALGEN time. You must
specify a unit number or a range of unit numbers.
The plotter device draws (or plots) ink plots of
computer-generated data. Its movement in producing the output is
measured in "steps." The steps refer to the speed per second of
the plotter and the distance (or size) that the pencils move on
the output paper. The paper for the plotter is either drum-fed
or bed-fed.
The defaults for plotter output are set by your system manager at
software-installation time through the generation of the
SYS:SPFORM.INI file. At some installations, the default setting
for the plotter form type is referred to as NORMAL.
Format
OPR>SET PLOTTER nn /switch argument<RET>
Arguments
nn specifies a plotter unit number. The number
is usually from 0 to 5, but can be larger if
your installation has more plotter devices.
n:m specifies a range of plotter unit numbers.
FORMS-TYPE name specifies the name of the type of plotter
forms. Typically, the normal plotter paper
form is roll-fed or bed-fed, but it can be
referred to as type ROLL, DRUM, or BED. Your
installation can have different form names for
different plotter types.
2-103
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SET PLOTTER
LIMIT-EXCEEDED-ACTION word
specifies what action, if any, should be taken
if a plotter job that is currently plotting on
the unit number you specify exceeds the output
limit. (The limit is set by the user with the
/LIMIT switch.) There are three possible words
associated with the LIMIT-EXCEEDED-ACTION
argument. They are:
ASK specifies that you be asked what to do if the
plotter job exceeds the output limit. You
then have the option to continue or abort the
plotter job.
ABORT specifies that the plotter job be
automatically canceled when the limit has been
exceeded.
PROCEED specifies that the plotter job continue
automatically and the specified output limit
be ignored.
OUTPUT-LIMIT minutes
specifies the maximum number of plotter
minutes.
PRIORITY-LIMITS nn specifies the priority limits (numeric
importance) of a plotter or a range of
plotters at the central site or at a node.
The numeric value associated with this
argument means that only plotter jobs
submitted by users with the /PRIORITY switch
specifying the number within the range you set
for the plotter can be output on that plotter.
The numeric value for the PRIORITY-LIMITS
argument can be from 1 to 63. The higher the
number, the higher the priority.
Switch
/NODE:identifier specifies the name of a node in the network.
It identifies a remote node for which the
command should be effective. For example, to
specify the node named KL1026, use
/NODE:KL1026. If you do not specify a node
identifier, your own node is the default.
2-104
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SET PLOTTER
Examples
1. Use the SET PLOTTER command to change the forms type of the
plotter.
OPR>SET PLOTTER 1 FORMS-TYPE ROLL<RET>
OPR>
09:34:12 Plotter 1 -- Set Accepted --
OPR>
2. Use the SET PLOTTER command to change the output limit.
Plotter jobs requiring more than 8 minutes will not be
started on Plotter 0.
OPR>SET PLOTTER 0 OUTPUT-LIMIT 8<RET>
OPR>
10:11:12 Plotter 0 -- Set Accepted --
OPR>
2-105
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SET PRINTER
2.42 SET PRINTER
Function
The SET PRINTER command specifies the kind of jobs to be
scheduled on this device. You can set the forms type, page
limits, priority limits, and the action to be taken when a job
exceeds its limit. This command allows you to change the
parameters that are set at GALGEN time. You must specify a
specific unit number or a range of unit numbers. In addition,
you can specify ranges for the page and priority limits.
The defaults for the line printers at your installation are set
by your system manager at software-installation time through the
generation of the SYS:n-CONFIG.CMD file (where n is the TOPS-10
software generation number) and the <SYSTEM>LPFORM.INI file.
These defaults are usually referred to as NORMAL in most
installations.
Format
OPR>SET PRINTER nn /switch argument<RET>
Arguments
nn specifies a printer unit number. The number
is usually from 0 to 5, but can be larger if
your installation has more printer devices.
n:m specifies a range of printer unit numbers.
FORMS-TYPE name specifies the name of the type of printer
forms. Typically, the normal paper form for
the printer is referred to as 1-ply-wide or
1-ply-narrow. These can be abbreviated as 1W
or 1N, or can be given some other name by your
system manager. Your installation can have
different names for different types of
line-printer forms.
2-106
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SET PRINTER
LIMIT-EXCEEDED-ACTION word
specifies what action, if any, should be taken
if a printer job that is currently printing on
the unit number you specify exceeds the limit
of output. The limit is set by the user with
/LIMIT. There are three possible actions
associated with the LIMIT-EXCEEDED-ACTION
argument. They are:
ASK specifies that the operator be asked what to
do if the printer job exceeds the page limit
on output. You then have the option to
continue or abort the printer job.
ABORT specifies that the print job be automatically
canceled when the limit has been exceeded.
PROCEED specifies that the print job continue
automatically and the specified output page
limit be ignored.
LP20-SIMULATION sets printer characteristics to simulate a
LP20 print controller, including loading the
same VFU and RAM files as LP20 printers,
assuming the device driver supports LP20
characteristics. The command does not affect
a printer that is started, but the command is
remembered, and if the printer is SHUTDOWN and
restarted, the new value takes effect. This
is the default for ANF printers.
MAGTAPE enables the print spooler to write non-system
defaults for magtape.
NO LP20-SIMULATION disables LP20 Print Controller simulation.
PAGE-LIMITS pages specifies the maximum page limit for printed
output. This argument can also specify a
range of page limits. The page limit refers
to the number of output pages that are
printed. This command restricts the size of
jobs that are sent to the printer you specify.
2-107
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SET PRINTER
PRIORITY-LIMITS nn specifies the priority limits (numeric
importance) of a line printer or a range of
line printers at the central site or at a
node. The numeric value associated with this
argument means that only printer jobs
submitted by users with the /PRIORITY switch
specifying the number within the range you set
for the line printer can be output on that
printer. The numeric value for the
PRIORITY-LIMITS argument can be from 1 to 63.
The higher the number, the higher the
priority.
UNIT-TYPE specifies a one to six character name of the
type of printer.
Switch
/NODE:identifier specifies the name of a node in the network.
It identifies a remote node for which the
command should be effective. For example, to
specify the node named KL1026, use
/NODE:KL1026. If you do not specify a node
identifier, your own node is the default.
Switches for MAGTAPE only
/DENSITY:nn specifies the BPI (bits-per-inch) density of
the tapes to be initialized. The number (nn)
can be 200, 556, 800, 1600, 6250, or DEFAULT.
If you do not specify the /DENSITY switch, the
density defaults to 1600 BPI. If you specify
200, 556, or 800, you must include /TRACKS:n.
/DIRECTORY-FILE: (YES, NO, or DEFAULT)
specifies whether to write record files to
tape. The default for this switch is YES.
/LABEL-TYPE:type specifies the type of label to be written on
the tape. The type can be ANSI, EBCDIC, IBM,
DEFAULT, or UNLABELED.
/MULTI-REEL: (YES, NO, or DEFAULT)
enables output to be written to more than one
reel of tape. The default for this switch is
YES.
2-108
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SET PRINTER
/PARITY: (ODD, EVEN, or DEFAULT)
specifies an EVEN or ODD parity for the tape.
The default for this switch is ODD.
/TRACKS: (7, 9, or DEFAULT)
sets the number of tracks for a magtape volume
set to 7, 9, or DEFAULT. If the tape density
you specify is 1600 or 6250 BPI, then 9 is the
default number of tracks. You must specify
the number of tracks when you specify any of
these tape densities: 200, 556, or 800 BPI.
/VOLUME-SET:string
specifies the name of the cataloged volume-set
("string").
Examples
1. Use the SET PRINTER command to set the default printer's
forms type to 1-ply-wide for all line printers at your
installation. NORMAL has been previously defined in the
LPFORM.INI file as 1-ply-wide paper. Printer requests for
other types of forms will not be started.
OPR>SET PRINTER 0:2 FORMS-TYPE NORMAL<RET>
OPR>
13:10:10 Printer 0 -- Set Accepted --
OPR>
13:10:11 Printer 1 -- Set Accepted --
OPR>
13:10:12 Printer 2 -- Set Accepted --
OPR>
2-109
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SET PRINTER
2. Use the SET PRINTER command to set the LIMIT-EXCEEDED-ACTION
to PROCEED. This means that all queued printer jobs that
exceed their output page limit continue to print and are not
aborted. In addition, there is no required operator action
to take except loading paper in the line printer.
OPR>SET PRINTER 0:1 LIMIT-EXCEEDED-ACTION PROCEED<RET>
OPR>
15:43:17 Printer 0 -- Set Accepted --
OPR>
15:43:18 Printer 1 -- Set Accepted --
OPR>
2-110
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SET SYSTEM
2.43 SET SYSTEM
Function
The SET SYSTEM command sets the following system parameters:
o maximum number of batch jobs that can run at one time
o minimum number of jobs reserved for batch processing
o maximum amount of core per job
o minimum amount of core per job
o system date
o system time
o system schedule bits
Format
OPR>SET SYSTEM keyword argument<RET>
Keywords
BATMAX n sets the maximum number of batch jobs that can
run at one time, where n is a number between 0
and 14, inclusive.
BATMIN n sets the minimum number of jobs that are
reserved for batch processing, where n is a
number between 0 and 14, inclusive.
CORMAX n sets the maximum core size for a job, where n
is a number from the minimum value set by
MONGEN (usually 10K) up to the total user
core. You can specify CORMIN in K (kilowords)
or P (pages). K is the default.
CORMIN n sets the minimum guaranteed contiguous core
for a job, where n is a number from the
minimum value set by MONGEN (usually 10K) up
to the total user core. You can specify
CORMIN in K (kilowords) or P (pages). K is
the default.
2-111
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SET SYSTEM
DATE dd-mmm-yy sets the system date. SET SYSTEM DATE does
not check the validity of the date argument,
as is done at system initialization.
DAYTIME hh:mm:ss sets the system time of day. This is a
potentially dangerous command; do not use it
except by express request of the system
manager.
DISK-CACHE-SIZE n sets the size of the monitor I/O cache. If
you do not specify a value for n, the default
is the configured size. (GALGEN)
LOGMAX n sets the maximum number of logged-in jobs that
can run on the system simultaneously, where n
is a number from 1 through 512, inclusive.
SCHEDULE nnnn sets the system schedule bits to one or more
of the specifications designated by the
following octal numbers:
0 specifies regular timesharing and batch
operations.
1 specifies that no users can log in,
except on the CTY.
2 specifies that no users can log in from
remote terminals, and data set requests
will be rejected.
4 specifies batch operation only.
10 specifies stand-alone operation only.
100 enables unprivileged users to assign
restricted devices.
200 allows spooling of output devices.
400 specifies no operator coverage.
1000 prevents automatic execution of NETLDR.
You may specify several uses by adding the
appropriate values. For example, the number
15 specifies stand-alone operations, batch
only operations, and no logins except from the
CTY (a combination of 1, 4, and 10).
2-112
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SET SYSTEM
Examples
1. Use the SET SYSTEM command to set the maximum number of jobs
that can log in to the system at one time to 100.
OPR>SET SYSTEM LOGMAX 100
OPR>
17:05:46 -- Set accepted, LOGMAX is now 100 --
OPR>
2. Use the SET SYSTEM command to set the minimum number of jobs
reserved for batch processing to 5.
OPR>SET SYSTEM BATMIN 5<RET>
OPR>
17:10:32 -- Set accepted, BATMIN is now 5 --
OPR>
2-113
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SET TAPE-DRIVE
2.44 SET TAPE-DRIVE
Function
The SET TAPE-DRIVE command sets the availability characteristics
of a particular tape-drive device. The SET TAPE-DRIVE command
allows you to do the following:
o Allow users to request that tapes be mounted
o Disallow users' requests to mount tapes
o Initialize tapes
You must specify the logical tape-drive name, and one of the
keywords: AVAILABLE, INITIALIZE, or UNAVAILABLE.
Format
OPR>SET TAPE-DRIVE keyword argument /switch<RET>
Keyword
MTxn: specifies the tape drive name, where x is the
tape-controller identification and n is the
tape-drive number. You must include the colon
at the end of the name. An example of a
logical tape-drive name is MTA0: for Magnetic
Tape Drive 0.
Arguments
AVAILABLE makes the specified tape drive available for
user tape mount requests. This argument
cancels the effect of the UNAVAILABLE
argument. The tape drive remains AVAILABLE
until you set it UNAVAILABLE.
2-114
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SET TAPE-DRIVE
INITIALIZE makes the specified tape drive unavailable for
user mount requests so that you can use it to
initialize tapes. A labeled tape is
initialized when you write a volume
identification at the beginning of the tape in
the standard ANSI format. An unlabeled tape
is initialized when you write a record
containing 80 null characters at the beginning
of the tape. When the tapes have been
INITIALIZEd, the tape drive automatically
becomes available for user mount requests.
You specify the number of tapes to be
initialized with the /COUNT switch.
UNAVAILABLE makes the specified tape drive unavailable to
user tape-mount requests. This argument
cancels the effect of the AVAILABLE argument.
If a user is currently using a tape on this
tape drive, the tape drive becomes unavailable
after the user completes his work. If the
system crashes or is shut down, the command
SET TAPE-DRIVE MTAn: UNAVAILABLE remains in
effect after the system is in operation again.
NOTE
Drives that are set UNAVAILABLE can be
ASSIGNed by user jobs. This could
pose a security problem, as no label
processing or verification is
performed by the system on an
UNAVAILABLE drive.
When you specify UNAVAILABLE, you can enter a
single- or multiple-line reason and terminate
it with a carriage return; or you can
terminate it immediately with a carriage
return after the UNAVAILABLE keyword and OPR
responds with ENTER TEXT AND TERMINATE WITH
^Z. You then enter as many lines of text as
you need. When you press <CTRL/Z>, the OPR>
prompt returns and your report is logged into
the ERROR.SYS file.
2-115
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SET TAPE-DRIVE
Switches for INITIALIZE only
/ABORT enables you to stop and cancel the
initializing process.
/COUNT:nn specifies the number (nn) of tapes to be
initialized. The /COUNT switch, when
specified, provides a mechanism for
initialization of multiple tapes with the same
attributes. Each tape prompts you with a WTOR
message for the volume identification. After
initialization, the tape is automatically
unloaded and the tape drive is ready to accept
the next tape to initialize. When as many
tapes as specified by the /COUNT switch have
been initialized, the tape drive returns to
the AVAILABLE (off-line) state.
If you use this switch, the volid you specify
in the /VOLUME-ID switch must have trailing
numerics which will allow the numeric value
specified by the /INCREMENT switch to be added
after each tape is initialized.
/DENSITY:nn specifies the BPI (bits-per-inch) density of
the tapes to be initialized. The number (nn)
can be 200, 556, 800, 1600, or 6250. If you
do not specify the /DENSITY switch, the
density defaults to 1600 BPI.
/INCREMENT:nn specifies the numeric value (nn) by which to
increment the tape volumes . This switch is
valid only when specified with the /VOLUME-ID
switch. If you do not include this switch,
the default increment value is 1. (Refer to
/COUNT.)
/LABEL-TYPE:type specifies the type of label to be written on
the tape. The type can be ANSI, EBCDIC, or
UNLABELED. If you specify any label type
other than unlabeled, you must include the
/VOLUME-ID switch.
2-116
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SET TAPE-DRIVE
/OVERRIDE-EXPIRATION: (YES or NO)
specifies whether to check for the expiration
date of the data on the tape. If you specify
NO and attempt to reinitialize a labeled tape
whose first file is not expired, the system
issues an error message and does not
reinitialize the tape. If you specify YES,
each tape is reinitialized unconditionally.
If you are initializing brand new tapes, you
should specify YES to prevent the tape drive
from "running away" when PULSAR tries to read
a label from the tape.
The default for this switch is YES.
/OWNER:[PPN]
specifies the project-programmer number of the
owner of the tapes to be initialized. This
switch affects only ANSI and EBCDIC labeled
tapes. If you do not specify the /OWNER
switch, the tape is initialized for owner
[0,0].
/PROTECTION:nnn specifies a 3-digit octal number as the
protection number of the tape. The number is
usually from 000 (where anyone can use the
tape) through 777 (where no one can use the
tape). If you do not specify the /PROTECTION
switch, the default is 000.
/TAPE-DISPOSITION:condition
specifies what is to be done to the tape after
it is initialized. The condition can be
either HOLD or UNLOAD. If you specify HOLD,
the tape is initialized and is not unloaded.
A user requesting the tape can use it without
your having to reload it. If you specify
UNLOAD, the tape is initialized and is
unloaded from the tape drive. The default is
UNLOAD. If a value greater than 1 is
specified by the /COUNT switch, the
/TAPE-DISPOSITION switch applies to the last
tape initialized.
2-117
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SET TAPE-DRIVE
/VOLUME-ID:"volid" specifies a volume identification for the
tape. The volid must be from 1 to 6
characters. If the volid is to contain any
nonalphanumeric characters, the volid must be
enclosed in double quotes ("). This switch is
not necessary if the tape is being initialized
as an unlabeled tape.
Restriction
If you set a tape drive to be UNAVAILABLE before you set the tape
drive to INITIALIZE, the following error message appears:
hh:mm:ss Device MTxn -- Illegal For UNAVAILABLE Device --
CAUTION
Setting a tape drive unavailable can produce a
system deadlock if insufficient resources exist
to satisfy outstanding disk and tape resource
requests.
The SET TAPE-DRIVE command to INITIALIZE must be given for a tape
drive that is AVAILABLE. When the initialization is complete,
the tape drive is left in an AVAILABLE (off-line) state.
Examples
1. A user (JONES.J) has requested a tape mount of an ANSI
labeled tape with a volid of FOOBAR and has requested that
you initialize the tape first. The volume is initialized
with ANSI labels and a volid of FOOBAR. (The system defaults
to density [1600 BPI] and protection [000].) When the tape is
mounted on the drive, the tape is initialized and then
becomes available to the user (/TAPE-DISPOSITION:HOLD).
Volume recognition takes over and satisfies the mount request
for FOOBAR.
2-118
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SET TAPE-DRIVE
OPR>
9:04:38 Device MTB3 -- Unlabeled volume mounted --
Density 1600 BPI, write-enabled
OPR>SET TAPE-DRIVE MTA3: INITIALIZE /LABEL-TYPE:ANSI -<RET>
/OWNER:[31,5723]/TAPE-DISPOSITION:HOLD/VOLUME-ID:FOOBAR<RET>
OPR>
9:05:12 Device MTA3 -- Volume initialized --
Volume Id:FOOBAR, Label type:ANSI, Density:1600
Owner:[31,5723], Protection:000
OPR>
9:05:14 Device MTA3 -- Volume Initialization complete --
Drive is available for use
OPR>
9:05:20 Device MTA3 -- Volume FOOBAR reassigned --
User: JONES.J [31,5723] Job# 39
OPR>
2. Use the SET TAPE-DRIVE command to set tape drive MTA1: to be
unavailable. Any user job currently using this device is
allowed to finish his work and dismount the tape before the
device becomes unavailable.
OPR>SET TAPE-DRIVE MTA1: UNAVAILABLE<RET>
Enter text and terminate with ^Z
TAPE DRIVE IS NEEDED BY FIELD SERVICE^Z
OPR>
10:23:46 Device MTA1 -- Set Unavailable --
OPR>
3. Use the SET TAPE-DRIVE command to make tape drive MTA3:
available for tape mounts.
OPR>SET TAPE-DRIVE MTA3: AVAILABLE<RET>
OPR>
12:02:2 Device MTA3 -- Set Available --
OPR>
2-119
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SET TERMINAL TYPE
2.45 SET TERMINAL TYPE
Function
The SET TERMINAL TYPE command sets your terminal to the model
number (mode) that it should be. You must specify the keyword
TYPE and the model name or number.
In addition, you can set your terminal to have OPR keypad
functions. Keypad functions allow you to give an OPR command by
pressing one of the PF keys to the right of the keyboard on VT52
and VT100 terminals. The functions are listed below with the
KEYPAD keyword.
Format
OPR>SET TERMINAL TYPE argument<RET>
Keywords
KEYPAD specifies that your terminal has the additional
set of keys to the right of your keyboard. These
keys are numbered 0 through 9 and are referred to
as PF keys. When you press any one of them, an
OPR command is automatically issued to the system.
The keypad function is valid for VT52 and VT100
terminals only; if you use it, you must set your
terminal to VT52 or VT100 before you set the
terminal to KEYPAD. The functions are as follows:
Key Function
0 No Function
1 SHOW STATUS
2 SHOW QUEUES
3 SHOW PARAMETERS
4 SHOW MESSAGES
5 SHOW ROUTE-TABLE
6 No Function
7 Clear screen, move OPR> prompt to top of
screen
8 SHOW OPERATORS
9 SHOW QUEUE MOUNT-REQUESTS
2-120
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SET TERMINAL TYPE
NOKEYPAD specifies that your terminal does not have the
additional keyboard feature to issue OPR commands
automatically to the system.
TYPE specifies the model/type name of your terminal
that automatically sets various terminal
parameters.
Arguments
33 VT101 VT240
35 VT102 VT330
LA120 VT103 VT340
LA36 VT125 VT50
VK100 VT180 VT52
VT05 VT185 VT61
VT100 VT220
Examples
1. Use the SET TERMINAL command to set your terminal to model
LA36.
OPR>SET TERMINAL TYPE LA36<RET>
OPR>
2. Set your terminal to VT100 mode, then to KEYPAD operation.
OPR>SET TERMINAL TYPE VT100<RET>
OPR>SET TERMINAL KEYPAD<RET>
OPR>
2-121
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SET USAGE
2.46 SET USAGE
Function
The SET USAGE command allows you to control the usage accounting
system during system operation. Consult your system manager
before you use the SET USAGE command. Your installation may have
specific usage accounting requirements for billing users
accessing the system.
Normally, the SYS:SYSTEM.CMD file contains the SET USAGE command.
Your system manager may have set up an accounting billing rate
for prime time users (for example, from 08:00 to 18:00) and for
off-prime time users (for example, from 19:00 to 07:00). There
may also be another accounting billing rate for weekend users.
The usage accounting file, ACT:USAGE.OUT, can be used to collect
accounting information such as CPU time, spooled output requests,
and disk space used. Depending on the method you use, accounting
data is collected and/or written to the ACT:USAGE.OUT file when
you give the SET USAGE command.
Format
OPR>SET USAGE keyword argument /switch<RET>
Keywords
BILLING-CLOSURE specifies that all session entries be closed
at a given time (by the argument hh:mm). This
keyword can be used when you want to
accumulate accounting data for users on the
system between prime time and non-prime time.
For example, a user is on the system between
16:00 and 19:00, and you set the billing
closure at 18:00 to collect prime time usage
between 16:00 and 18:00.
FILE-CLOSURE specifies that the current usage file be
closed and renamed, and that a new usage file
(USAGE.OUT) be opened. The old usage file is
renamed in the format of yymmdd.hhx, where:
yy is the year.
mm is the month.
dd is the day.
2-122
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SET USAGE
hh is the hour.
x is a sequence number in the range 0
through 9.
The renamed file, like the USAGE.OUT file, is
stored in the ACT:[1,7] directory.
When you specify FILE-CLOSURE, a
BILLING-CLOSURE operation is performed
automatically. If you do not want a
BILLING-CLOSURE performed, specify the
/NO-SESSION-ENTRIES switch to prevent it.
Arguments
hh:mm specifies the time (24-hour clock time) in
hours (hh) and minutes (mm) separated by a
colon.
DAILY hh:mm specifies file closure on a daily basis at a
particular time in hours (hh) and minutes
(mm).
EVERY day hh:mm specifies file closure on a particular day at
a particular time in hours (hh) and minutes
(mm). The day parameter for the EVERY
argument can be SUNDAY, MONDAY, TUESDAY,
WEDNESDAY, THURSDAY, FRIDAY, or SATURDAY.
NOW specifies file closure to occur immediately.
mm-dd-yy hh:mm specifies a date and time when the file
closure will occur. The date is in the format
of "mm-dd-yy," where mm is the month, dd is
the day, and yy is the year separated by
hyphens. (You can optionally specify the date
in the format of "dd-xxx-yy," where xxx is an
abbreviated month name.) The time is in the
format of "hh:mm," where hh is the hour and mm
is the minutes separated by a colon. The time
applies to a 24-hour clock.
Switch
/NO-SESSION-ENTRIES
Disables automatic BILLING-CLOSURE when you
use the FILE-CLOSURE keyword. This switch is
valid only with the FILE-CLOSURE keyword.
2-123
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SET USAGE
Restrictions
If the specified time for the execution of this command occurs
when the system is down, the usage activity will not occur when
the system is restarted.
Examples
1. Close the billing sessions for the change between first and
second shift.
OPR>SET USAGE BILLING-CLOSURE 16:30<RET>
13:21:27 --Will close billing sessions at 15-Jul-88 16:29:59--
OPR>
At 16:30 (4:30 PM), or shortly thereafter, the following
message appears on the OPR terminal.
OPR>
16:34:22 -- Message from the Accounting System --
Session entries written for all jobs
OPR>
2. Close and rename the USAGE.OUT file. Do not attempt to do
this until you check with your system manager.
OPR>SET USAGE FILE-CLOSURE NOW<RET>
OPR>
9:25:37 -- Message from the Accounting System --
ACT:USAGE.OUT closed and renamed to ACT:800715.090[1,7]
OPR>
2-124
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SHOW
2.47 SHOW
Function
The SHOW command displays system information. The SHOW command
does not alter or change any jobs, queues, or devices.
Because the SHOW command is complex, each of the following
keywords is described in the following sections:
ALLOCATION
CONTROL-FILE
MESSAGES
NETWORK-QUEUE-NAMES
OPERATORS
PARAMETERS
QUEUES
ROUTE-TABLE
STATUS
SYSTEM
TIME
2-125
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SHOW ALLOCATION
2.48 SHOW ALLOCATION
Function
The SHOW ALLOCATION command displays allocations for all
mountable devices (disk drives and tape drives). This command
displays the disk drive name, the structure name, and, for tapes,
the track size and BPI density of the allocated resource. It
shows the number of devices allocated and the number of devices
mounted. You can display the mountable device allocations for
all job requests, all batch job requests, a particular batch
request, or a particular job request.
Use the SHOW ALLOCATION command when you need to know what types
of disk or tape drives are allocated to a job that is waiting in
the batch queue. The job could be waiting because another batch
job has already allocated the needed resources. Thus, the
waiting batch job allocation requests can not be answered. In
addition, this command is useful when you need to know what
mountable device allocations have been made by timesharing users.
Format
OPR>SHOW ALLOCATION argument<RET>
Arguments
ALL-REQUESTS specifies display of the mountable device
allocations for all job requests (batch and
timesharing) that are currently logged-in or
waiting in the batch queue to be executed.
BATCH-REQUEST nn specifies display of the allocations for the
batch request with the identification number
nn. If you do not specify the batch request
number (nn), all batch job requests are
displayed.
JOB nn specifies display of the mountable device
allocation for a particular job (either batch
or timesharing). You must specify the job
number (nn) with this argument.
2-126
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SHOW ALLOCATION
Examples
1. Use the SHOW ALLOCATION command for all batch job requests.
OPR>SHOW ALLOCATION BATCH-REQUEST<RET>
OPR>
8:40:32 -- Mountable Device Allocations --
Allocation for batch request 3 DAN DEUFEL [30,5215]
Volume set Resource Type All Own
------------------ ---------------- ------------ --- ---
--- RP06 Disk unit 1 1
CBL1 CBL1 Structure 1 1
Allocation for batch request 19 DPM [50,56]
Volume set Resource Type All Own
------------------ ---------------- ------------ --- ---
DSKC DSKC Structure 1 1
Allocation for batch request 24 SYSV52 [1,2]
Volume set Resource Type All Own
------------------ ---------------- ------------ --- ---
--- 9 TK 800/1600 Magtape unit 1 1
--- RP06 Disk unit 1 0
DSKB DSKB Structure 1 1
DSKC DSKC Structure 1 1
VOL-SET VOL1 Magtape vol. 1 1
OPR>
2. Use the SHOW ALLOCATION command for timesharing job 13.
OPR>SHOW ALLOCATION JOB 13<RET>
OPR>
10:51:34 -- Mountable Device Allocations --
Allocation for job 13 OPR [1,2]
Volume set Resource Type All Own
------------------ ---------------- ------------ --- ---
DSKB DSKB Structure 1 1
DSKC DSKC Structure 1 1
OPR>
2-127
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SHOW CONTROL-FILE
2.49 SHOW CONTROL-FILE
Function
The SHOW CONTROL-FILE command displays the control file of a
batch job that is processing in a particular batch stream. The
only keyword for this command is BATCH-STREAM followed by the
stream number. You must specify the BATCH-STREAM keyword.
This command enables you to display a particular stream while the
job is processing, to see any possible problems that might come
about due to an incorrect command, and to check whether there are
any commands that require an operator action of some kind.
Format
OPR>SHOW CONTROL-FILE keyword nn /switch<RET>
Keywords
BATCH-STREAM specifies a particular batch input stream.
nn specifies the stream number of the batch
stream to be displayed by OPR. You must
specify this stream number.
Switch
/LINES:number specifies the number of lines of the control
file in the batch stream you want displayed.
If you do not specify the /LINES switch, the
default is ten lines.
2-128
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SHOW CONTROL-FILE
Examples
1. Use the SHOW CONTROL-FILE command to display four lines of a
control file in batch stream 2.
OPR>SHOW CONTROL-FILE BATCH-STREAM 2 /LINES:4<RET>
OPR>
16:42:20 Batch-Stream 2 Job # 3 -- Show-Control-File --
Job MYFILE Req #121 for ADLEY [27,1331]
.MOUNT TAPE REEL1:
.COMPILE TEST2/FORTRAN
.EXECUTE
.DISMOUNT TAPE REEL1:
*** END OF DATA ***
OPR>
2. Use the SHOW CONTROL-FILE command to display ten lines in
batch stream 0.
OPR>SHOW CONTROL-FILE BATCH-STREAM 0<RET>
OPR>
13:20:30 Batch-Stream 0 Job #12 -- Show-Control-File --
Job EDIT01 Req #211 for LATTA [27,2444]
*F.PG[
*M.
*D.
*E
.IF (ERROR) .GOTO DEL1
.SOS
*F.PG[
*M.
*D.
*E
*** END OF DATA ***
OPR>
2-129
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SHOW MESSAGES
2.50 SHOW MESSAGES
Function
The SHOW MESSAGES command displays any outstanding messages that
require you to perform an action or reply with the RESPOND
command.
With the SHOW MESSAGES command, you can specify an outstanding
message number or a node. If you do not specify either a message
number or a node, OPR responds with all outstanding messages that
you are enabled to receive.
Use the RESPOND command to respond to any outstanding message
displayed by this SHOW command.
Format
OPR>SHOW MESSAGES nnnn /switch<RET>
Keyword
nnnn specifies the outstanding message number.
Valid message numbers can range from 0 to
9999. If you do not specify a message number,
all outstanding messages with their sequence
numbers, if any, are displayed, provided you
have enabled the messages to appear at the OPR
terminal.
Switch
/NODE:identifier specifies the name of a node in the network.
It identifies a remote node for which the
command should be effective. For example, to
specify the node named KL1026, use
/NODE:KL1026. If you do not specify a node
identifier, your own node is the default.
If you do not specify the /NODE switch, all
outstanding messages with their sequence
numbers, if any, are displayed, provided that
the messages are enabled to appear at the OPR
terminal.
2-130
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SHOW MESSAGES
Restriction
If you have disabled the output display of ALL-MESSAGES and/or
OPR-ACTION-MESSAGES, or if there are no outstanding messages, OPR
responds with the message:
hh:mm:ss -- No Outstanding Messages --
where hh:mm:ss is the time (in hours, minutes, seconds) of the
response.
Examples
1. Use the SHOW MESSAGES command to display all outstanding
messages with their sequence numbers. You are enabled to
receive the output display of all messages.
OPR>SHOW MESSAGES<RET>
OPR>
10:25:12 -- System messages outstanding --
9:38:21 <2> --Message from timesharing user --
job 48 [27,5434]MORRILL at TTY 142
Ignore this message
9:41:07 <3> Printer 0 [NOVA(31)]
Please load forms type 'NARROW'
Type 'RESPOND <number> PROCEED' when ready
OPR>
2. Use the SHOW MESSAGES command to display an outstanding
message with the message number 47.
OPR>SHOW MESSAGES 47<RET>
OPR>
12:45:21 -- System messages outstanding --
12:30:30 <47> Batch-Stream 0 JOB #30
Job TEST Req #321 for DZIEDZIC[10,6016]
Is anyone there?
OPR>
2-131
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SHOW NETWORK-QUEUE-NAMES
2.51 SHOW NETWORK-QUEUE-NAMES
Function
The SHOW NETWORK-QUEUE-NAMES command displays the information
specified by the DEFINE NETWORK-QUEUE-NAMES command.
Format
OPR>SHOW NETWORK-QUEUE-NAMES<RET>
Example
Use the SHOW NETWORK-QUEUE-NAMES command to display defined queue
names.
OPR>SHOW NETWORK-QUEUE-NAMES<RET>
OPR>
11:51:55 -- Network Queue Names --
Queue Name Type Object Type Node Unit
------------------------ ------ ---------------- ------ -------
SI$8700 Remote Printer JUNIPR 0
SI$87PLOT Remote Plotter JUNIPR 0
SWE$LN03 Remote Printer GALLO Generic
TOPS$LN03 Remote Printer VINO LAT999
OPR>
2-132
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SHOW OPERATORS
2.52 SHOW OPERATORS
Function
The SHOW OPERATORS command displays the terminal and job numbers
of all users on the system who are running OPR. The display
shows the node, terminal number, job number, and user's name.
In addition, you can specify the /NODE switch (network software)
to display all users running OPR at a remote station. If you do
not specify the /NODE switch, all operators on the system (all
nodes included) are displayed.
Format
OPR>SHOW OPERATORS /switch<RET>
Switch
/NODE:identifier specifies the name of a node in the network.
It identifies a remote node for which the
command should be effective. For example, to
specify the node named KL1026, use
/NODE:KL1026. If you do not specify a node
identifier, your own node is the default.
Restriction
If there are no users running OPR at the node you specify in the
SHOW OPERATORS command, OPR responds with:
hh:mm:ss -- No Operators at Node name --
where name is the node name or number.
2-133
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SHOW OPERATORS
Examples
1. Use the SHOW OPERATORS command to display all users on the
system running OPR.
OPR>SHOW OPERATORS<RET>
OPR>
12:23:34 -- Operators --
Node Type Terminal Job User
----- ------ -------- --- ----------------------
KL1026(26) System 4 1 OPR [1,2]
KL1026(26) System 0 27 OPR [1,2]
KL1026(26) System 1 5 SYSV52 [1,2]
OPR>
2. Use the SHOW OPERATORS command to display the operators on
node CTCH22.
OPR>SHOW OPERATOR /NODE:CTCH22<RET>
OPR>
14:23:45 -- Operators --
Node Type Terminal Job User
----- ------ -------- --- ----------------------
CTCH22(22) System 1 13 OPR [1,2]
CTCH22(22) System 17 41 HARAMUNDANIS [27,4117]
OPR>
2-134
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SHOW PARAMETERS
2.53 SHOW PARAMETERS
Function
The SHOW PARAMETERS command displays the current defaults and
values for a particular device or range of devices, or all
devices known to the system.
You can use the SHOW PARAMETERS command to check the current
values of a device before and after you change the parameters of
a particular device. If you do not specify a keyword with the
SHOW PARAMETERS command, the command defaults to all devices. If
you do not specify an argument to the keyword, the command
defaults to all devices or streams of the type you specify.
Use SET to change the parameters. Parameters are documented
under SET commands.
Format
OPR>SHOW PARAMETERS keyword argument /switch<RET>
Keywords
BATCH-STREAM displays information about the specified batch
input stream or a range of batch streams.
CARD-PUNCH displays information about the specified
card-punch or a range of such devices.
FAL-STREAM displays the network type associated with the
specified FAL stream (ANF-10 or DECnet).
NETWORK-NODE displays the IBM network parameters of nodes
currently known to the system. This argument
displays valid information only if your
installation has IBM Communications software.
The display shows the value of the arguments
that can be altered with the DEFINE and SET
NODE commands.
NQC-STREAM displays information about the specified NQC
stream or a range of NQC streams.
PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH displays information about the specified
paper-tape-punch or a range of such devices.
2-135
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SHOW PARAMETERS
PLOTTER displays information about the specified
plotter or a range of such devices.
PRINTER displays information about the specified
line-printer or a range of such devices.
Arguments
nn specifies a numeric value representing a
batch-stream number or a device unit number.
The number is usually from 0 to 5, but can be
larger if your installation has acquired
additional devices.
n:m specifies a range of batch streams or unit
numbers.
Switch
/NODE:identifier specifies a remote node for which the command
is effective. For example, use /NODE:KL1026
to specify the node named KL1026. If you do
not specify /NODE:identifier, your own node is
the default.
Examples
1. Use the SHOW PARAMETERS command to display the current
parameters of all batch streams.
OPR>SHOW PARAMETERS BATCH-STREAMS<RET>
OPR>
18:25:07 -- System Device Parameters --
Batch-Stream Parameters:
Strm Minutes Prio Core limits Opr-Intvn
---- ----------- ----- ----------- ---------
0 0:3600 1:63 1:2000 Yes
1 0:10 1:19 1:2000 Yes
2 0:11000 1:19 1:2000 Yes
3 0:11000 20:63 1:2000 Yes
4 0:3600 1:63 1:512 No
OPR>
2-136
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SHOW PARAMETERS
2. Use the SHOW PARAMETERS command to display the current
parameters of the card punch.
OPR>SHOW PARAMETERS CARD-PUNCHES 0<RET>
OPR>
19:43:30 -- System Device Parameters --
Card-Punch Parameters:
Unit Card-Limits Form Prio Lim-Ex Dev-Chars
---- ------------ ------ ----- ------ ---------
0 1:500 NORMAL 1:63 Ask
OPR>
3. Use the SHOW PARAMETERS command to display the current
parameters of all line-printer devices.
OPR>SHOW PARAMETERS PRINTER<RET>
OPR>
16:45:10 -- System Device Parameters --
Printer Parameters:
Unit Node Page Limits Form Prio Lim Ex Dev-Chars
---- ---------- ------------ ------ ------ ------ ---------
0 KL1026(26) 1:5000 NARROW 1:63 Ask Lower
1 KL1026(26) 1:20000 NORMAL 1:63 Ask Lower
OPR>
2-137
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SHOW QUEUES
2.54 SHOW QUEUES
Function
The SHOW QUEUES command displays the queue, or list of jobs, for
a particular device or for all batch streams. SHOW QUEUES also
displays the queue for pending system events such as scheduled
system shutdown and billing file closure. The SHOW QUEUES
command displays the following:
o active job requests
o job requests waiting to be processed
o held job requests that must be rescheduled.
You can display all jobs in all queues or only jobs in particular
queues. The default for the SHOW QUEUES command is ALL-JOBS.
The asterisk (*) before a job name in the SHOW QUEUES display
designates currently active job requests.
Format
OPR>SHOW QUEUES keyword /switch<RET>
Keywords
ALL-JOBS shows all queues for the system. ALL-JOBS is
the default of the SHOW QUEUES command.
BATCH-JOBS specifies all batch jobs
CARD-PUNCH-JOBS specifies all card-punch jobs
EVENTS specifies the following system events:
o billing file closure (BILCLS)
o ORION log file closure (OPRFIL)
o usage file closure (USGFIL)
o scheduled system shutdown (KSYS)
o scheduled command file execution (TAKFIL)
2-138
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SHOW QUEUES
MOUNT-REQUESTS specifies requests for tape and disk structure
mounts.
PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH-JOBS
specifies all paper-tape-punch jobs
PLOTTER-JOBS specifies all plotter jobs
PRINTER-JOBS specifies all line-printer jobs
Switches
/NODE:identifier displays the given queue for the node you
specify. For example, /NODE:KL1026 specifies
the node named KL1026. If you do not specify
a node identifier, your own node is the
default.
/ALL displays a full queue listing. A full listing
includes column headers, as well as the
switches (for example, /HOLD), and default
parameters that apply to the jobs.
/SHORT displays an abbreviated queue listing. A
short listing displays the job name, request
number, scheduled run time or expiration, and
the user name of each job in the queue. A
short listing does not display column headers,
switches, or default parameters.
/USER:[PPN] displays only jobs submitted by a particular
user. The user is identified by his
project-programmer number [PPN].
2-139
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SHOW QUEUES
Examples
1. Use the SHOW QUEUES command to display batch jobs that are
processing or waiting to be processed by the batch system.
OPR>SHOW QUEUES BATCH-JOBS /ALL<RET>
OPR>
14:23:14 -- System Queues Listing --
Batch Queue:
Job Name Req# Run Time Core User
-------- ---- -------- ---- ------------------------
* GENSCH 21 00:05:00 500 FRIES [10,3711] In Stream:0
/Uniq:Yes /Restart:No /Seq#:713
Job 14 Running MACRO Runtime 0:01:41
* DFRPM 25 00:20:00 500 GATULIS [27,3123] In Stream:1
Job# 17 Running LINK Last Label: LOAD Runtime 0:00:04
SBUILD 29 01:00:00 500 KIRSCHEN [30,5215]
/After: 5-Jan-88 20:00:00 /Uniq:Yes
/Restart:Yes /Seq#:784
WEEKLY 37 00:05:00 500 OPERATOR [1,2] Hold:Yes
/Uniq:Yes /Restart:No /Seq#:791
There are 4 jobs in the Queue (2 in Progress)
OPR>
2. Use the SHOW QUEUES command to display any current
MOUNT-REQUESTS that are mounted, waiting to be mounted, or
are being dismounted.
OPR>SHOW QUEUES MOUNT-REQUESTS<RET>
OPR>
19:52:21 -- System Queues Listing --
Mount Queue:
Volume Status Type Write Req# Job# User
------- -------- ---- ------- ---- ---- ---------------
GOO1 Waiting Tape Enabled 24 28 ENGEL [30,3456]
GOO2 Waiting Tape Enabled 25 28 ENGEL [30,3456]
DSKZ Waiting Disk 52 23 BROWN [27,5107]
TEST Waiting Tape Locked 76 12 JONES [10,1310]
There are 4 Requests in the Queue
OPR>
2-140
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SHOW QUEUES
3. Use the SHOW QUEUES command with the /SHORT switch, to
display all jobs in the line-printer queue.
OPR>SHOW QUEUES PRINTER /SHORT<RET>
OPR>
15:50:15 -- System Queues Listing --
Printer Queue:
* DBBIND 49 108 FRIES,A [10,2311]
* TRY 60 27 NICHOLS [30,1201]
TEST01 69 50 BROWN,E [27,5107]
SCHEDU 79 100 OPERATOR [1,2]
OPR>
4. Use the SHOW QUEUES command to display the items in the EVENT
queue.
OPR>SHOW QUEUES EVENTS<RET>
11:51:58 -- System Queues Listing --
Event Queue:
Type Req# Expiration Description
-------- ------ ------------------ ------------------------
USGFIL 14 8-Oct-88 23:59:30 Usage file closure
OPRFIL 18 9-Oct-88 0:00:00 ORION log file closure
* KSYS 15 10-Oct-88 0:00:00 Debug new monitor
There are 3 events in the queue (1 in progress)
2-141
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SHOW ROUTE-TABLE
2.55 SHOW ROUTE-TABLE
Function
The SHOW ROUTE-TABLE command applies only if your installation
has remote station communication software. The SHOW ROUTE-TABLE
command displays the routing tables of the nodes whose output has
been transferred by means of the ROUTE command. See the
description of the ROUTE command in this chapter.
The SHOW ROUTE-TABLE command has no keywords and no switches.
Format
OPR>SHOW ROUTE-TABLE<RET>
Examples
1. Use the SHOW ROUTE-TABLE command to display the current nodes
that have been routed within your network system.
OPR>SHOW ROUTE-TABLE<RET>
15:04:17 -- System Device Routing Table --
Printer 0 [KL1026(26)] Routed to Printer 1 [CTCH22(22)]
All Printers [NOVA(31)] Routed to [KL1026(26)]
OPR>
2. Use the SHOW ROUTE-TABLE command, when no routing has been
done.
OPR>SHOW ROUTE-TABLE<RET>
OPR>
16:30:23 -- No routing has been performed --
OPR>
2-142
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SHOW STATUS
2.56 SHOW STATUS
Function
The SHOW STATUS command displays the current status of a
particular device or range of devices on the system. You can
display the status of batch or FAL streams, input/output units,
tape-drives, network nodes, or all current devices known to the
system.
The SHOW STATUS command is useful when you want to know the
current status of the system. You can issue this command to
check whether devices are active or idle.
If you do not specify a keyword with the SHOW STATUS command, the
command defaults to batch streams, printers, and readers. In
addition, if your installation has a card punch, paper-tape
punch, or plotter, the SHOW STATUS command displays the status of
these devices.
Format
OPR>SHOW STATUS keyword argument/switch<RET>
Keywords
BATCH-STREAM nn or n:m
displays the status of a batch input stream or
range of batch streams.
CARD-PUNCH nn or n:m
displays the status of one or more card-punch
devices.
DISK-DRIVE structure-name:
displays the status of all the disk drives
currently known to the system. With this
keyword, you can specify the /ALL, /FREE, or
/MOUNTED switch. /ALL is the default.
FAL-STREAM nn or n:m
displays the status of a FAL stream or range
of FAL streams.
2-143
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SHOW STATUS
NETWORK-NODE node-name
displays the on-line/off-line status of all
nodes currently known to the system. This
keyword takes a node name as an argument to
show the status of a specific node.
NQC-STREAM nn or n:m
displays the status of a NQC stream or range
of NQC streams.
PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH nn or n:m
displays the status of one or more
paper-tape-punch devices.
PLOTTER nn or n:m
displays the status of one or more plotter
devices.
PRINTER nn or n:m
displays the status of one or more
line-printer devices.
READER nn or n:m
displays the status of one or more card reader
input devices.
STRUCTURE structure-name
displays the status of a file structure known
to the system. If you do not specify a
structure, all structures are shown. With
this keyword, you can specify a structure name
and/or the /USERS switch.
TAPE-DRIVE
displays the status of one or more magnetic
tape-drive units known to the system. You
must include the colon after the tape drive
number. With this keyword, you can specify a
tape-drive name (in the format of MTxn:), the
/ALL switch, or the /FREE switch.
2-144
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SHOW STATUS
Arguments
nn specifies a batch or FAL stream number, or a
device unit number.
n:m specifies a range of batch or FAL streams, or
a range of unit numbers.
MTxn: specifies a tape drive name, where x is the
tape controller number identification and n is
the tape drive number. You must include the
colon after the tape drive name.
structure-name: specifies the logical disk file structure
name. The name can consist of 1 to 4
alphanumeric characters. You must include the
colon after the structure name.
Switches
/NODE:identifier displays the status of the given device for
the node you specify. To specify a node name,
for example KL1026, use /NODE:KL1026. If you
do not specify a node identifier, your own
node is the default.
/SHORT displays only the stream/unit number, the
current status, the job name, the request-id
number, and the user name with column headers.
If you do not specify the /SHORT switch,
additional information, such as the job number
and the run time, appears in the display for
each job request. This switch is not valid
with the DISK-DRIVE, FAL-STREAM, STRUCTURE, or
TAPE-DRIVE keywords.
DISK-DRIVE Switches
/ALL displays the status of both free disk drives
and mounted disk drives. This switch is
assumed if you do not specify a switch.
/FREE displays only those disk drives that are
available for structure mounts.
/MOUNTED displays only those disk drives that are
currently mounted and being accessed.
2-145
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SHOW STATUS
STRUCTURE Switch
/USERS displays all the usernames of all users
currently logged in and using the specified
structure. If you do not specify a
structure-name, the /USERS switch lists all
users for all structures known to the system.
TAPE-DRIVE Switches
/ALL displays all tape drives known to the system.
The status display also provides additional
information, such as the AVR status, the label
type, and the density (BPI). If you do not
specify the /ALL switch, the additional
information does not appear in the status
display.
/FREE displays all tape drives that are currently
unloaded and available for mounting tape
volumes. The /FREE switch also displays those
tape drives that are loaded, but are not being
accessed by any user.
Examples
1. Use the SHOW STATUS command to display the current status of the
line printers.
OPR>SHOW STATUS PRINTER<RET>
OPR>
16:33:42 -- System Device Status --
Printer Status:
Unit Node Status Jobname Req# User
---- ---------- ----------- ------- ---- ---------------------
0 KL1042(42) Active R4PPR2 106 MEIDELL [10,5411]
Started at 13:44:40, printed 142 of 1012 pages
1 Idle
OPR>
2-146
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SHOW STATUS
2. Use the SHOW STATUS command to display the current status of all
the tape drives on the system.
OPR>SHOW STATUS TAPE-DRIVE /ALL<RET>
OPR>
10:12:00 --Tape Drive Status--
Drive Trk Status AVR Density Write Volume Req# User
----- --- ------ --- -------- ----- ------ ---- ----------------
MTA0 9 Free Yes 800/1600
MTA1 9 Online Yes 1600 Locked 100200 64 PURRETTA [10,54]
MTA2 9 Online Yes 1600 Enabled TEST 58 OPERATOR [1,2]
MTA5 7 Free Yes 200/556/800
2-147
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SHOW SYSTEM
2.57 SHOW SYSTEM
Function
The SHOW SYSTEM command displays system lists and the system
parameters set with the SET SYSTEM command.
The SHOW SYSTEM command does not display the parameters set with
the SET SYSTEM DATE or SET SYSTEM DAYTIME commands. To display
the current DATE and DAYTIME parameters, use the SHOW TIME
command.
See the MODIFY command in this chapter for information on
altering the system lists. See the SETSRC description in the
TOPS-10 User Utilities Manual for information on changing the
system search list.
Format
OPR>SHOW SYSTEM keyword <RET>
Keywords
LISTS displays the following system lists:
o Active Swapping List
o Crash Dump List
o System Search List
The active-swapping list displays the
disk-unit names for page swapping of memory.
The crash-dump list displays the structure
names that the system uses to dump memory
during a system crash. The system-search list
displays the structure names that the system
uses to search for file structures and file
names.
LISTS is the default for the SHOW SYSTEM
command.
2-148
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SHOW SYSTEM
PARAMETERS displays the following parameters set with the
SET SYSTEM command:
o BATMAX
o BATMIN
o CORMAX
o CORMIN
o LOGMAX
o LOGMIN
o SCHEDULE
Examples
1. Use the SHOW SYSTEM LISTS command to display the current
system lists.
OPR>SHOW SYSTEM LISTS<RET>
OPR>
09:30:21 -- System lists --
Crash Dump List: DSKC:, DSKB:, BLKX:, BLKY:
Active Swapping List: RPD4:, RPB2:, RPD0:
System Search List: DSKC:, DSKB:
OPR>
2. Use the SHOW SYSTEM PARAMETERS command to display the current
system parameters.
OPR>SHOW SYSTEM PARAMETERS<RET>
OPR>
15:57:24 -- System Parameters --
CPU0 is running and scheduling jobs
CPU1 is running and scheduling jobs
LOGMAX: 100 jobs out of 100
SCHEDULE: 000000
No restrictions
BATMAX: 13 jobs CORMAX: 1024 pages
BATMIN: 0 jobs CORMIN: 100 pages
Disk cache size: 400 blocks Configured size: 400 blocks
OPR>
2-149
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SHOW TIME
2.58 SHOW TIME
Function
The SHOW TIME command displays the current system date and time.
The date is shown in the format of dd-mmm-yy (dd=day, mmm=month,
yy=year). The time is shown in the format of hh:mm:ss (hh=hour,
mm=minutes, ss=seconds).
Format
OPR>SHOW TIME<RET>
Example
Use the SHOW TIME command to display the current date and time.
OPR>SHOW TIME<RET>
25-Dec-88 11:55:34
OPR>
2-150
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SHUTDOWN
2.59 SHUTDOWN
Function
The SHUTDOWN command terminates scheduling for the devices or
streams you specify. To restart a device or stream, use the
START command. The SHUTDOWN command allows the current job to
complete processing, then terminates the stream or device and no
further jobs are processed.
Format
OPR>SHUTDOWN keyword argument /switch<RET>
Keywords
BATCH-STREAM nn or n:m
shuts down a batch stream or a range of batch
streams.
CARD-PUNCH nn or n:m
shuts down a card-punch or a range of
card-punches.
FAL-STREAM nn or n:m
shuts down a FAL stream or range of FAL
streams.
NODE identifier specifies a remote node for which the command
will be effective. For example, use
/NODE:KL1026 to specify the node named KL1026.
If you do not specify a node identifier, your
own node is the default.
NQC-STREAM nn or n:m
shuts down a NQC stream or range of NQC
streams.
PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH nn or n:m
shuts down a paper-tape-punch or a range of
paper-tape-punches.
2-151
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SHUTDOWN
PLOTTER nn or n:m
shuts down a plotter or a range of plotters.
PRINTER shuts down a line printer or a range of such
devices.
READER nn or n:m
shuts down a card reader (input) or a range of
card readers.
Arguments
nn specifies the stream number or unit number to
be shut down. You must specify a stream or
unit number.
n:m specifies a range of stream/unit numbers. You
can specify this range instead of a single
stream/unit number. The colon must separate
the two numbers. The n represents the
low-order number, and the m represents the
high-order number.
Switch
/NODE:identifier specifies a remote node for which the command
will be effective. For example, use
/NODE:KL1026 to specify the node named KL1026.
If you do not specify a node identifier, your
own node is the default.
Examples
1. Use the SHUTDOWN command to terminate the card punch on the host
system. site.
OPR>SHUTDOWN CARD-PUNCH 0<RET>
OPR>
13:23:33 Card-punch 0 -- Shutdown at EOJ Scheduled --
OPR>
2-152
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SHUTDOWN
2. Use the SHUTDOWN command to terminate all batch streams.
OPR>SHUTDOWN BATCH-STREAM 0:2<RET>
OPR>
12:30:15 Batch-stream 0 -- Shutdown --
OPR>
12:30:16 Batch-stream 1 -- Shutdown at EOJ Scheduled --
OPR>
12:30:17 Batch-stream 2 -- Shutdown at EOJ Scheduled --
OPR>
3. Use the SHUTDOWN command to terminate the line printers at your
site.
OPR>SHUTDOWN PRINTER 0:1<RET>
OPR>
16:23:45 Printer 0 -- Shutdown at EOJ Scheduled --
OPR>
16:23:46 Printer 1 -- Shutdown --
OPR>
2-153
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
START
2.60 START
Function
The START command starts the scheduling for the specified
devices. Use the START command to restart devices that you
stopped with the SHUTDOWN command.
Format
OPR>START keyword argument/switch<RET>
Keywords
BATCH-STREAM nn or n:m
starts a batch stream or a range of batch
streams.
CARD-PUNCH nn or n:m
starts a card-punch or a range of
card-punches.
FAL-STREAM nn or n:m
starts a FAL stream or range of FAL streams.
NODE node-name
starts an IBM Communications node.
NQC-STREAM nn or n:m
starts a NQC stream or range of NQC streams.
PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH nn or n:m
starts a paper-tape-punch or a range of
paper-tape-punches.
PLOTTER nn or n:m
starts a plotter or a range of plotters.
2-154
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
START
PRINTER nn or n:m
starts a line printer or a range of such
devices.
READER nn or n:m
starts a card reader or a range of card
readers.
Arguments
nn specifies the stream number or unit number to
be started. You must specify a stream or unit
number.
n:m specifies a range of stream/unit numbers. You
can specify this range instead of a single
stream/unit number. The colon must separate
the two numbers. The n represents the
low-order number, and the m represents the
high-order number.
Switches
/NODE:identifier specifies a remote node for which the command
will be effective. For example, use
/NODE:KL1026 to specify the node named KL1026.
If you do not specify a node identifier, your
own node is the default.
/DEVICE:dev: specifies that printer output be written to a
named device. This switch is useful when you
must transfer printer output from one site to
another, or when you have printer hardware
problems. Before you use the START PRINTER
command with the /DEVICE switch, you must set
the device as unavailable for user requests.
(For additional information, see the TOPS-10
Operator's Guide.)
2-155
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
START
Examples
1. Use the START command to start the line printer on the host
system.
OPR>START PRINTER 0<RET>
OPR>
20:31:09 Printer 0 -- Startup Scheduled --
OPR>
2. Use the START command to start all batch streams.
OPR>START BATCH-STREAM 0:3<RET>
OPR>
12:15:32 Batch-stream 0 -- Startup Scheduled --
OPR>
12:15:38 Batch-stream 1 -- Startup Scheduled --
OPR>
12:15:44 Batch-stream 2 -- Startup Scheduled --
OPR>
12:15:50 Batch-stream 3 -- Startup Scheduled --
OPR>
3. Use the START command to start the card-punch devices at your
site.
OPR>START CARD-PUNCH 0:1<RET>
OPR>
13:17:23 Card-punch 0 -- Startup Scheduled --
OPR>
13:17:30 Card-punch 1 -- Startup Scheduled --
OPR>
2-156
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
STOP
2.61 STOP
Function
The STOP command temporarily stops the following devices and
streams:
o Batch streams
o Card punches
o FAL streams
o NQC streams
o Paper-tape punches
o Plotters
o Printers
o Card readers
You can use the STOP command to halt a device when a hardware problem
occurs.
When you use the STOP command, the device remains active, and jobs
requesting that device can still be scheduled. However, when you
specify the argument, AFTER EVERY-REQUEST, the device stops after it
completes each job request.
Use the CONTINUE command to reactivate a device or stream after a STOP
command has been issued.
Format
OPR>STOP keyword arguments /switch<RET>
Keywords
BATCH-STREAM nn or n:m
stops a batch input stream or a range of batch
input streams.
2-157
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
STOP
CARD-PUNCH nn or n:m
stops a card punch or a range of such devices.
FAL-STREAM nn or n:m
stops a FAL stream or range of FAL streams.
NQC-STREAM nn or n:m
stops a NQC stream or range of NQC streams.
PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH nn or n:m
stops a paper-tape punch or a range of such
devices.
PLOTTER nn or n:m
stops a plotter or a range of such devices.
PRINTER nn or n:m
stops a line printer or a range of such
devices.
READER nn or n:m
stops a card reader (input) or a range of such
devices.
Arguments
nn specifies the stream number or unit number to
be stopped.
n:m specifies a range of stream or unit numbers.
You can specify this range instead of a single
stream or unit number. The colon must
separate the two numbers. The n represents
the low-order number, and the m represents the
high-order number.
AFTER CURRENT-REQUEST
stops the specified device after the current
job request has completed. All other devices
of the same type will continue to process job
requests. Use CONTINUE to start processing
other jobs in the queue.
2-158
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
STOP
AFTER EVERY-REQUEST
stops the specified device after each job
request has completed. To start another job
on the device, use the CONTINUE command. You
can clear this argument from the device only
by shutting down the device and then
restarting it (see the SHUTDOWN and START
commands).
IMMEDIATELY stops the specified device immediately. If a
job is being processed on the device, it is
stopped. This argument is the default of the
STOP command.
Switch
/NODE:identifier specifies a remote node for which the command
will be effective. For example, use
/NODE:KL1026 to specify the node named KL1026.
If you do not specify a node identifier, your
own node is the default.
Examples
1. Use the STOP command to stop the card reader temporarily to
prevent a card-reader jam.
OPR>STOP READER 0<RET>
OPR>
9:20:10 Reader 0 -- Stopped --
OPR>
2. Use the STOP command to stop a batch stream after it
completes processing the current batch job.
OPR>STOP BATCH-STREAM 2 AFTER CURRENT-REQUEST<RET>
OPR>
18:23:55 Batch-stream 2 -- STOP command queued --
OPR>
2-159
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
STOP
3. Use the STOP command to stop a line printer that was
processing a request.
OPR>STOP PRINTER 1 IMMEDIATELY<RET>
OPR>
11:37:02 Printer 1 -- Stopped --
OPR>
2-160
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SUPPRESS
2.62 SUPPRESS
Function
The SUPPRESS command allows you to convert all vertical form
motion characters to single-space characters. All form feeds and
multiple line feeds are converted to a single line feed. Thus,
the paging motion in a printer-job request is ignored. However,
this command does not cause printing to occur across the forms
page burst (perforation).
The SUPPRESS command is useful when you want to stop a user's
program that caused a print loop, for example when bad code
causes too many form feeds. When this happens, you can stop the
printer, issue the SUPPRESS command, and then continue the
printer, thus saving paper. To continue printing normally, use
this command with /STOP (SUPPRESS PRINTER n/STOP).
You must specify the PRINTER keyword and unit number.
Format
OPR>SUPPRESS keyword nn /switch<RET>
Keyword
PRINTER nn suppresses vertical motion on the specified
line-printer. You must include the unit
number. (for example, 0 for LPT0, 1 for LPT1,
and so forth).
Switches
/NODE:identifier specifies the name of a node in the network.
It identifies a remote node for which the
command should be effective. For example, to
specify the node named KL1026, use
/NODE:KL1026. If you do not specify a node
identifier, your own node is the default.
/FILE specifies the file currently being printed.
(Refer to the BACKSPACE and FORWARDSPACE
commands.)
2-161
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
SUPPRESS
/JOB specifies the job currently being printed.
With the /JOB switch, the entire job is
suppressed, regardless of how many files or
switches were specified when the job was
originally queued to print. The /JOB switch
is the default of the SUPPRESS command.
/STOP specifies that normal printing is to resume,
and that the carriage control on the line
printer is no longer to be suppressed. When
you specify this switch, the job that is
currently printing reverts to the print job
format that was being used before the SUPPRESS
command was issued.
Examples
1. Use the SUPPRESS command to suppress paging motion on line
printer 0. The SUPPRESS command affects the entire job that
is currently being printed.
OPR>SUPPRESS PRINTER 0<RET>
OPR>
06:37:41 Printer 0 -- Carriage control suppressed --
Job DUMP01 Req #23 for OPERATOR [1,2]
OPR>
2. Use the SUPPRESS command to stop the suppression of form
feeds and carriage returns on line printer 0 after a runaway
job has completed printing. The line printer is now free to
print the next job in the queue.
OPR>SUPPRESS PRINTER 0 /STOP<RET>
OPR>
07:32:12 Printer 0 -- Carriage control activated --
Job DUMP01 Req #23 for OPERATOR [1,2]
OPR>
2-162
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
TAKE
2.63 TAKE
Function
The TAKE command automatically executes the commands in a command
file. A typical command file contains commands that perform a
series of related tasks. For example, the SYSTEM.CMD file
contains OPR commands that set and start devices and streams
automatically.
Format
OPR>TAKE keyword argument /switch<RET>
Keyword
filespec specifies the input file name and file
extension of the file that contains the
executable OPR commands. The file name can
consist of no more than 6 alphanumeric
characters. The file extension can consist of
no more than 3 alphanumeric characters. The
standard extension for command files is CMD,
but any specified extension works. The
filespec can be a full file specification
consisting of:
str:filnam.ext[PPN]
where str: is the file structure, filnam is
the file name, .ext is the file extension, and
[PPN] is the project-programmer number. If
you do not specify the str:, OPR defaults to
the current job's search list. If you do not
specify the [PPN], OPR defaults to your disk
area.
2-163
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
TAKE
Arguments
NOW specifies that OPR executes the commands in
the command file immediately.
+hh:mm:ss specifies the number of hours, minutes, and
seconds from the current time that OPR will
execute the commands in the command file.
This time must be at least five minutes from
the current time.
hh:mm:ss specifies the time in hours, minutes, and
seconds when OPR will execute the commands in
the command file.
dd-mmm-yy:hh:mm:ss
specifies the day, month, and year, as well as
the time when OPR will execute the commands in
the command file.
DAILY hh:mm:ss specifies that OPR executes the contents of
the file every day at the given time.
EVERY "DAY" hh:mm:ss
specifies that OPR will execute the contents
of the command file at the given time on the
day you specify. "DAY" can be any day of the
week.
Switches
/DISPLAY displays all messages from the command file,
any error messages that occur, and the OPR
commands after they have been executed.
/NODISPLAY does not display the OPR commands that exist
in the command file after their execution.
All other messages appear with the /NODISPLAY
switch specified. This switch is the default
of the TAKE command.
/REASON:comment allows you to specify why a particular command
file is to be executed
2-164
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
TAKE
Examples
1. Use the TAKE command to execute a series of OPR commands that
are in OPR001.CMD, which resides in your [PPN].
OPR>TAKE OPR001.CMD/DISPLAY<RET>
OPR>START BATCH-STREAM 0:2
14:54:10 Batch-stream 0 -- Startup Scheduled --
14:54:12 Batch-stream 1 -- Startup Scheduled --
14:54:15 Batch-stream 2 -- Startup Scheduled --
OPR>START PRINTER 0:1
14:54:18 Printer 0 -- Startup Scheduled --
14:54:21 Printer 1 -- Startup Scheduled --
OPR>
2. Use the TAKE command to execute a series of OPR commands from
DSKZ:OPR.CMD[10,10].
OPR>TAKE DSKZ:OPR.CMD[10,10] /NODISPLAY<RET>
OPR>
16:43:07 Card-punch 0 -- Shutdown Scheduled --
16:43:11 Plotter 0 -- Shutdown Scheduled --
16:43:15 Reader 0 -- Shutdown Scheduled --
16:43:18 Paper-tape-punch 0 -- Shutdown Scheduled --
OPR>
2-165
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
TAKE
3. Specify a time for the TEST.CMD file to be executed.
OPR>TAKE DSK:TEST.CMD 20-NOV-88:12:00:00<RET>
OPR>
16:40:56 -- Event job TAKFIL queued, request 162 --
OPR>
Display the event queue to check that the TAKE command was
properly queued.
OPR>SHOW QUEUES EVENTS<RET>
OPR>
16:41:08 -- System Queues Listing --
Event Queue:
Type Req# Expiration Description
------ --- ------------------ ------------------------
BILCLS 24 19-Nov-88 16:59:59 Prime time rates end
USGFIL 44 19-Nov-88 23:59:30 Usage file closure
OPRFIL 38 20-Nov-88 0:00:00 ORION log file closure
BILCLS 15 20-Nov-88 7:59:59 Discount rates end
TAKFIL 162 20-Nov-88 12:00:00 Time-of-day OPR command file
* KSYS 103 21-Nov-88 0:00:00 Timesharing will end
There are 6 events in the queue (1 in progress)
OPR>
2-166
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
UNLOCK
2.64 UNLOCK
Function
The UNLOCK command allows you to permit timesharing users and
batch jobs to access a particular structure currently LOCKed from
system allocation. The UNLOCK command reverses the effect of the
LOCK command.
Format
OPR>UNLOCK structure-name: date-and-time<RET>
Arguments
structure-name: specifies a 1- to 4-character structure name
that is currently LOCKed from system
allocation. The structure must be mounted and
on-line. The name must end with a colon (:).
date-and-time specifies an optional date and time when the
structure will be UNLOCKed so that users can
access it. The date is in the format of
"mm-dd-yy," where mm is the month, dd is the
day, and yy is the year, separated by hyphens.
The time is in the format of "hh:mm," where hh
is the hour and mm is the minutes, separated
by a colon. The time applies to a 24-hour
clock.
Restrictions
If you specify a structure name not known to the system, you get
the following error message:
? No such device
If you specify a structure name that is currently UNLOCKed, you
get the following message:
hh:mm:ss -- Structure name already UNLOCKed --
If you specify an optional date without a time, the time defaults
to 00:00:00 (or the start of that date).
2-167
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
UNLOCK
If you specify an optional time without a date, the date defaults
to the current date. If the time has already occurred for the
current date, the time applies to the next day.
Example
Use the UNLOCK command to unlock structure DSKZ:.
OPR>UNLOCK DSKZ: 3-7-88 17:00<RET>
OPR>
13:03:13 -- Structure DSKZ unlocked --
OPR>
2-168
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
UNRESTRICT
2.65 UNRESTRICT
Function
The UNRESTRICT command returns a restricted device to general
use. See the RESTRICT command for information about limiting the
use of a device.
Format
OPR>UNRESTRICT dev:<RET>
Argument
dev: specifies the name of the device to be
returned to general use.
Example
Use the UNRESTRICT command to remove the restrictions on MTA3.
OPR>UNRESTRICT MTA3:<RET>
OPR>
16:29:24 -- Device MTA3: unrestricted --
OPR>
2-169
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
WAIT
2.66 WAIT
Function
The WAIT command is used with batch control files to prevent OPR
from accepting a command before a previously issued command is
finished being processed.
The OPR program is designed to accept and process commands
immediately, and the batch system (BATCON) will send commands to
OPR as soon as the previous command is accepted.
Most OPR commands require processing by other modules of the
operating system. OPR can accept a command, dispatch it to the
appropriate module, and accept another command from the batch
file before the output from the first command returns to OPR.
For example, it is possible for an EXIT command in the batch file
to be processed before the response to the previously issued
command is displayed. The WAIT command should be entered between
the previous command and the EXIT command, to allow the first
command to finish processing before the EXIT command is sent to
OPR.
Format
OPR>WAIT n
where n is the number of seconds that OPR should wait before
accepting the next command in the batch file. The value of n
must be between 1 and 60.
Warning
Using the WAIT command does NOT guarantee that the output from
the first command will be successfully displayed before the EXIT
command is accepted and processed by OPR. OPR will, however,
WAIT the specified number of seconds, and the output from the
first command will be displayed if it is ready before the
specified number of seconds is up.
Example
The following batch file may be submitted to the batch system:
@ENABLE
$OPR
*SHOW STATUS TAPE-DRIVE
*EXIT
2-170
OPR COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
WAIT
When this job is processed, the SHOW STATUS command is issued and
accepted by OPR, passed to ORION for processing, and then the
output is passed back through OPR to BATCON. However, BATCON
will send the EXIT command immediately after OPR dispatches the
SHOW STATUS command. When OPR receives the EXIT command, it
causes the batch job to exit from OPR immediately, before the
output from SHOW STATUS is received by OPR.
The following batch file uses the WAIT command to cause OPR to
WAIT for the specified number of seconds before accepting the
EXIT command:
@ENABLE
$OPR
*SHOW STATUS TAPE-DRIVE
*WAIT 10
*EXIT
2-171
3-1
CHAPTER 3
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
This chapter describes the following OPR command subsets:
o CATALOG
o CONFIG
o LCP
o NCP
o QUOTA
3.1 ENTERING AND EXITING OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
To enter an OPR command subset, use the OPR command, ENTER, as shown
below.
OPR>ENTER CATALOG<RET>
CATALOG>
To exit an OPR command subset and return to OPR command level, use the
RETURN command as shown below:
CATALOG>RETURN<RET>
OPR>
To exit an OPR command subset and return to monitor command level, use
the EXIT command as shown below:
CATALOG>EXIT<RET>
.
3-1
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
TOP-LEVEL COMMANDS
3.2 TOP-LEVEL COMMANDS
After you enter a command subset, there are two levels of commands
available to you: a limited number of OPR commands, and the subset
commands themselves. All of the subsets include the following OPR
commands as top-level (OPR) commands:
o ENTER
o EXIT
o PUSH
o TAKE
o WAIT
These commands function at the subset level exactly as they do at OPR
command level. See Chapter 2 for more information about these
commands.
3-2
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
CATALOG COMMANDS
3.3 CATALOG COMMANDS
The CATALOG program maintains the system catalog files and the
information about the volume-sets stored in those files. The operator
interface to the CATALOG program is the CATALOG application in OPR.
System Administrator privileges are required.
This section describes the CATALOG commands listed below:
o DELETE
o DISABLE
o ENABLE
o HELP
o INSERT
o LIST
o MODIFY
o SHOW
3-3
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
CATALOG COMMANDS
DELETE
Function
The DELETE command removes the entry for a specified volume-set
from the system catalog.
Format
CATALOG>DELETE keyword argument<RET>
Keywords
DECTAPE deletes the specified DECtape volume-set from
the catalog.
MAGTAPE deletes the specified magtape volume-set from
the catalog.
STRUCTURE deletes the specified structure volume-set
from the catalog.
Argument
volume-set name specifies the name of the volume-set for
magtape or DECtape or structure-name for disk
to be deleted.
Restriction
Due to the destructive nature of the DELETE command, you must
specify the entire volume-set or structure-name. Abbreviations
are not allowed.
Example
Delete the DSKD entry from the system catalog.
CATALOG>DELETE STRUCTURE DSKD<RET>
CATALOG>
9:24:27 -- Structure DSKD deleted --
CATALOG>
3-4
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
CATALOG COMMANDS
DISABLE
Function
The DISABLE command turns off the automatic updating feature.
The DISABLE command prevents QUASAR from automatically updating
the catalog to correct discrepancies between mounted media and
cataloged information.
Format
CATALOG>DISABLE keyword<RET>
Keywords
DECTAPE disables catalog updates for DECtapes.
MAGTAPE disables catalog updates for magtapes.
STRUCTURE disables catalog updates for structures.
Example
Disable the catalog updating function for structures.
CATALOG>DISABLE STRUCTURE<RET>
CATALOG>
9:24:27 -- Structure catalog updates disabled --
CATALOG>
3-5
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
CATALOG COMMANDS
ENABLE
Function
The ENABLE command turns on the automatic catalog update feature.
When this feature is enabled, QUASAR automatically updates the
catalog to correct discrepancies between mounted media and
cataloged information.
Format
CATALOG>ENABLE keyword<RET>
Keywords
DECTAPE enables automatic catalog updates for
DECtapes.
MAGTAPE enables automatic catalog updates for
magtapes.
STRUCTURE enables automatic catalog updates for
structures.
Example
Enable the automatic catalog updating feature for structures.
CATALOG>ENABLE STRUCTURE<RET>
CATALOG>
9:24:27 -- Structure catalog updates enabled --
CATALOG>
3-6
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
CATALOG COMMANDS
HELP
Function
The HELP command displays information about CATALOG commands,
including command descriptions, command syntax, and examples.
Format
CATALOG>HELP keyword <RET>
where "keyword" is any CATALOG command.
Examples
1. Type HELP to display general information about the CATALOG
command, HELP.
CATALOG>HELP<RET>
The HELP command will display the description, syntax, and
one or more examples of any command available for use in
managing the catalog files.
Command syntax:
HELP command-name
Example:
CATALOG>HELP (with) SHOW
The SHOW command causes information about ...
2. Type HELP SHOW to find out more about the SHOW command.
CATALOG>HELP SHOW<RET>
The SHOW command causes information about a specific
volume-set to be displayed on the terminal. Unique
abbreviations for a volume-set name are allowed. This
command takes no options. Its only arguments are the catalog
type (DECtape, magtape, or structure) and the volume-set name
to be displayed on the terminal.
Command syntax:
-- DECTAPE --
/ \
SHOW ---- MAGTAPE ---- volume-set
\ /
- STRUCTURE -
3-7
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
CATALOG COMMANDS
Example:
CATALOG>SHOW STRUCTURE DSKD<RET>
CATALOG>
9:24:27 -- Structure catalog --
Structure DSKD
Owned by [10,56] DPM
Location: DPM's office
Unit Type Class
----- ------ ------
DSKD0 RP06 1
DSKD1 RP04 1
DSKD2 RP06 1
CATALOG>
3-8
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
CATALOG COMMANDS
INSERT
Function
The INSERT command creates entries for volume-sets in the system
catalog. The INSERT command allows you to include owner and
media storage location data, as well as volume-specific data, if
applicable.
The INSERT command has optional subcommands as well as keywords
and switches. Two right angle brackets following the word
CATALOG indicate INSERT subcommand level. For example:
CATALOG>>
Format
CATALOG>INSERT keyword argument/switches<RET>
CATALOG>>subcommand
Keywords
DECTAPE creates an entry for a DECtape volume-set.
MAGTAPE creates an entry for a magtape volume-set.
STRUCTURE creates an entry for a structure volume set.
Argument
volume-set name creates a new volume-set entry with the name
you specify. Note that the new volume-set
name must not already exist in the specified
catalog. Attempting to insert an existing
volume-set causes an error.
Use the following format to create a new
volume-set with the same parameters as an old
volume-set:
new-volume-set = old-volume-set
3-9
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
CATALOG COMMANDS
Switches
/DENSITY:argument sets the magtape density to 200, 556, 800,
1600, or 6250. You must specify /DENSITY when
creating magtape volume-sets. (MAGTAPE only)
/EXPIRATION:date sets the expiration date. (MAGTAPE, DECTAPE,
and STRUCTURE)
/LABEL-TYPE:type specifies the type of label on the tape.
Options include ANSI, BYPASS, DEFAULT, IBM,
NOLABELS, USER-EOT. (MAGTAPE only)
/LOCATION:text specifies the volume-set storage location.
The text string can be 19 characters long.
Use quotes around any text string that
contains characters other than A-Z, a-z, or -
(hyphen). (MAGTAPE, DECTAPE, and STRUCTURE)
/NAME:user name specifies the user name associated with the
owner of the volume-set. The name can be 39
characters long. The name need not be the
same as the name associated with the PPN in
ACTDAE.SYS, the system accounting file. You
must use quotes around any text string that
contains characters other than A-Z, a-z, or -
(hyphen). (MAGTAPE, DECTAPE,and STRUCTURE)
/REELID:id specifies the reel identification. (DECTAPE
only)
/TRACKS:argument sets the number of tracks. Arguments are 7 or
9. If the tape density you specify is 1600 or
6250 BPI, then 9 is the default number of
tracks. The /TRACKS switch applies only to
magtape volume-sets. You must specify the
number of tracks when you specify any of these
tape densities: 200, 556, or 800 BPI.
(MAGTAPE only)
/USER:[PPN] sets the owner PPN of the volume-set. You can
specify a wildcard for the PPN. You can
specify a wildcard for the project number, the
programmer number, or both. For example:
[10,*], [*,56] and [*,*]. (MAGTAPE, DECTAPE,
and STRUCTURE)
3-10
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
CATALOG COMMANDS
Subcommands
ADD appends volumes to a volume set entry.
Magtape format:
CATALOG>>ADD reel-id
Structure format:
CATALOG>>ADD unit-id drive-type class
DONE completes an INSERT session.
QUIT cancels the current INSERT command.
REMOVE deletes a volume-set entry you have just
entered with the ADD command. The REMOVE
command only deletes volume-set entries you
have entered during the current INSERT
session. You must use the DELETE command to
delete previously existing volume-set entries.
Examples
1. The following example uses the INSERT command to create a DECtape
entry.
CATALOG>INSERT DECTAPE TEST/NAME:DPM/USER:[10,56]<RET>
CATALOG>
9:24:27 -- DECtape TEST inserted --
CATALOG>
2. The following example uses the INSERT command to create a magtape
entry.
CATALOG>INSERT MAGTAPE TEST/DENSITY:1600/TRACKS:9<RET>
CATALOG>>ADD (reel) TEST0
CATALOG>>ADD (reel) TEST1
CATALOG>>DONE
CATALOG>
9:24:27 -- Magtape TEST inserted --
CATALOG>
3-11
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
CATALOG COMMANDS
3. The following example uses the INSERT command to create a
structure entry.
CATALOG>INSERT STRUCTURE DSKD/LOCATION:1026/NAME:DPM/USER:[10,56]<RET>
CATALOG>>ADD (unit) DSKD0 (type) RP06 (class) 1
CATALOG>>ADD (unit) DSKD1 (type) RP06 (class) 1
CATALOG>>DONE
CATALOG>
9:24:27 -- Structure DSKD inserted --
CATALOG>
3-12
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
CATALOG COMMANDS
LIST
Function
The LIST command writes the entries for all volume-sets into a
catalog file. (Use SHOW to list them on your screen.)
Format
CATALOG>LIST keyword filespec<RET>
Keywords
DECTAPE lists DECtape volume-set entries.
MAGTAPE lists magtape volume-set entries.
STRUCTURE lists structure volume-set entries.
filespec is in the following form:
dev:file.ext[path]
and has the following defaults:
dev: DSK
file catalog file name
ext LST
path current path
Example
The following example illustrates the LIST command.
CATALOG>LIST STRUCTURE<RET>
CATALOG>
9:24:27 -- Structures listed to file DSKB:STRLST.LST[1,2] --
CATALOG>
3-13
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
CATALOG COMMANDS
MODIFY
Function
The MODIFY command changes the volume-set attributes and volume
specific information for an existing catalog entry.
The MODIFY command has optional subcommands as well as keywords
and switches. Two right angle brackets represent the CATALOG
subcommand prompt. For example:
CATALOG>>
Format
CATALOG>MODIFY keyword argument/switches optional subcommand<RET>
Keywords
DECTAPE modifies a DECtape volume-set entry.
MAGTAPE modifies a magtape volume-set entry.
STRUCTURE modifies a disk structure volume set entry.
Argument
volume-set name modifies the existing volume-set entry that
you specify.
Switches
/DENSITY:argument sets the magtape density to 200, 556, 800,
1600, or 6250. You must specify /DENSITY when
creating magtape volume-sets. (MAGTAPE only)
/EXPIRATION:date sets the expiration date. (MAGTAPE,
DECTAPE,and STRUCTURE)
/LOCATION:text specifies the volume-set storage location.
The text string can be 19 characters long.
Use quotes around any text string that
contains characters other than A-Z, a-z or -
(hyphen). (MAGTAPE, DECTAPE,and STRUCTURE)
3-14
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
CATALOG COMMANDS
/NAME:user name specifies the name associated with the owner
of the volume-set. The name can be 39
characters long. The name need not be the
same as the name associated with the PPN in
ACTDAE.SYS, the system accounting file. You
must use quotes around any text string that
contains characters other than A-Z, a-z, or -
(hyphen). (MAGTAPE, DECTAPE,and STRUCTURE)
/REELID:DECtape specifies the reel identification. (DECTAPE
only)
/TRACKS:argument sets the number of tracks for a magtape volume
set to 7 or 9. If the tape density you
specify is 1600 or 6250 BPI, then 9 is the
default number of tracks. You must specify
the number of tracks when you specify any of
these tape densities: 200, 556, or 800 BPI.
(MAGTAPE only)
/USER:[PPN] sets the owner PPN of the volume-set. You can
specify a wildcard for the project number, the
programmer number, or both. For example:
[10,*], [*,56] and [*,*]. (MAGTAPE,
DECTAPE,and STRUCTURE)
Subcommands
ADD appends volumes to a volume set entry.
Magtape format:
CATALOG>>ADD reel-id
Structure format:
CATALOG>>ADD unit-id drive-type class
DONE completes an insertion command.
QUIT cancels the current INSERT command.
REMOVE deletes a volume-set entry you have just
entered with the ADD command. The REMOVE
command deletes only volume-sets you have
entered during the current insertion. Use the
DELETE command to delete previously existing
volume-sets.
3-15
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
CATALOG COMMANDS
Restrictions
Due to the destructive nature of the MODIFY command, you must
specify the entire volume-set name. Abbreviations are not
allowed.
Examples
1. Use the MODIFY command to change the volume-set expiration
date.
CATALOG>MODIFY MAGTAPE TEST/EXPIRATION:15-JAN-89<RET>
CATALOG>>DONE
CATALOG>
13:21:26 -- Magtape TEST modified --
CATALOG>
2. Use the MODIFY command to add a second tape to the
volume-set.
CATALOG>MODIFY MAGTAPE TEST<RET>
CATALOG>>ADD TEST2
CATALOG>>DONE
CATALOG>
13:23:12 -- Magtape TEST modified --
CATALOG>
3-16
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
CATALOG COMMANDS
RETURN
Function
The RETURN command exits the CATALOG command subset and returns
you to OPR command level.
Format
CATALOG>RETURN<RET>
OPR>
3-17
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
CATALOG COMMANDS
SHOW
Function
The SHOW command displays information about a specified
volume-set.
Format
CATALOG>SHOW keyword argument<RET>
Keywords
DECTAPE displays information about DECtape volume-
sets.
MAGTAPE displays information about magtape volume-
sets.
STRUCTURE displays information about structure volume-
sets.
Argument
volume-set name displays information about the volume-set you
specify. You can use a unique abbreviation
for the volume-set name.
Examples
1. Use the SHOW command to display information about structure
DSKT.
CATALOG>SHOW STRUCTURE DSKT<RET>
CATALOG>
16:42:24 -- Structure catalog --
Structure DSKT
Location: Mounted on 1026
Owned by [1,2] System disk
Unit Type Class
------ ----- ------
DSKT0 RA81 0
DSKT1 RA81 0
CATALOG>
3-18
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
CATALOG COMMANDS
2. Use the SHOW command to display information about magtape
volume-set TEST.
CATALOG>SHOW MAGTAPE TEST<RET>
CATALOG>
16:14:46 -- Magtape catalog --
Magtape TEST
Location: By 1026 racks
Expiration date: 15-Jan-89
Owned by [10,6016] DZIEDZIC
Label type: ANSI Tracks: 9 Density: 1600
Number Reelid
------ ------
1 TEST0
2 TEST1
3 TEST2
CATALOG>
3-19
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
CONFIG COMMANDS
3.4 CONFIG COMMANDS
CONFIG allows you to reconfigure system hardware without halting the
system. CONFIG, formerly a separate program, is now part of OPR.
This section describes the CONFIG commands listed below:
o ADD
o AUTO-CONFIGURE
o HELP
o LOAD
o REMOVE
o SET
o SHOW
o SHUTDOWN
o SNAPSHOT
o SUSPEND
NOTE
The keywords for the ADD, AUTO-CONFIGURE, and REMOVE
commands depend on the options available on your
system. If you press ? to display keywords, CONFIG
displays only the keywords that apply to your system.
See the TOPS-10 Operator's Guide for more information about CONFIG.
3-20
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
CONFIG COMMANDS
ADD
Function
The ADD command adds the following to the system:
o devices
o disk controllers
o tape controllers
o CI (Computer Interconnect) interface
o NI (Network Interconnect) interface
o CPUs (see restriction)
o memory (see restriction)
Format
CONFIG>ADD keyword argument<RET>
Keywords
ALL-CI adds all CI interfaces.
ALL-NI adds all NI interfaces.
CPUn adds the specified CPU to the system. n is
the CPU number.
Rxy adds the specified disk controller to the
system. x and y identify the disk controller.
MTx adds the specified tape controller to the
system. x identifies the tape controller.
CI-n adds the specified CI interface to the system.
n is the interface number. If you have more
than one CI interface, the keyword list
includes ALL-CI as an option.
3-21
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
CONFIG COMMANDS
NI-n adds the specified NI interface to the system.
n is the interface number. If you have more
than one NI interface, the keyword list
includes ALL-NI as an option.
device specifies the device being added.
MEMORY nn to nn adds the specified range of memory to the
total system configuration. You can specify
the range as octal or decimal. To specify an
octal address, include a pound sign (#) before
the number.
For example,
#nn specifies an octal address
nn specifies a decimal address
The default unit of memory is words, however,
you can specify the memory unit in pages or
kilowords (blocks of 1024 words). To specify
pages, add the letter "P" to the number.
Include the letter "K" to the number to
specify kilowords.
For example,
nnP specifies pages
nnK specifies kilowords
Restriction
To add processors and memory to an SMP system you must follow, in
sequence, the procedural steps outlined in the TOPS-10 Operator's
Guide (Section 11.17, Adding Processors and Memory to SMP
Systems).
Examples
1. Use the ADD command to add CPU1 to the system.
CONFIG>ADD CPU1<RET>
CONFIG>
15:06:13 CONFIG -- ADD CPU --
CPU1 added
CONFIG>
3-22
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
CONFIG COMMANDS
2. Use the ADD command to increase total system memory from 512K
to 768K.
CONFIG>ADD MEMORY (from) 512K (to) 768K<RET>
CONFIG>
16:18:18 CONFIG -- ADD MEMORY --
Memory from address 512K to 768K is now online
(Words from 2000000 to 3000000)
CONFIG>
3. Use the ADD command with ? to list devices you can add.
CONFIG>ADD ?<RET>one of the following:
CPU0 CPU1 CPU2
or one of the following:
RAG RAJ RPA RPB RPC RPD RPE RPF RPG
or one of the following:
MTA MTB MTC
or one of the following:
ALL-CI CI-0 CI-1 CI-2
or one of the following:
ALL-NI NI-0 NI-1 NI-2
or MEMORY
or device name
CONFIG>ADD
3-23
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
CONFIG COMMANDS
ALLOCATE DUMP-BUFFER
Function
The ALLOCATE DUMP-BUFFER command allocates memory so that the
IPA20 DRAM can be dumped to the system error log file when the
specified interface device reloads.
The IPA20 is the microprocessor controlling the CI20 and NIA20
interfaces.
Format
CONFIG>ALLOCATE DUMP-BUFFER keyword<RET>
Keywords
CI-n specifies a CI20 interface. n is the
interface number.
ALL-CI specifies all CI20 interfaces.
NI-n specifies an NIA20 interface. n is the
interface number.
ALL-NI specifies all NIA20 interfaces.
Example
Use the ALLOCATE command to allocate memory in the monitor for
the dump from the CI20 interface for CPU1.
CONFIG>ALLOCATE DUMP-BUFFER CI-1<RET>
CONFIG>
10:18:45 CONFIG -- ALLOCATE DUMP-BUFFER --
Dump buffer allocated for KLP1
CONFIG>
3-24
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
CONFIG COMMANDS
AUTO-CONFIGURE
Function
The AUTO-CONFIGURE command automatically configures disks and
tapes into the system. Use this command to configure devices
that were powered-off when the system was first bootstrapped.
Format
CONFIG>AUTO-CONFIGURE keyword <RET>
Keywords
ALL-CPUs automatically configures disks and tapes on
all available CPUs into the system.
CPUn automatically configures all disks and tapes
on the specified CPU into the system. n is
the CPU number.
Example
Use the AUTO-CONFIGURE command to configure all disks and tapes
on CPU1 into the system.
CONFIG>AUTO-CONFIGURE CPU1<RET>
CONFIG>
10:45:18 CONFIG -- AUTOCONFIGURE --
CONFIG>
3-25
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
CONFIG COMMANDS
LOAD
Function
The LOAD command loads microcode for the following types of
devices:
o disk controllers
o tape controllers
o CI (Computer Interconnect) interface
o NI (Network Interconnect) interface
Format
CONFIG>LOAD keyword argument<RET>
Keywords
Rxy loads microcode on the specified disk
controller. x and y identify the disk
controller.
MTx loads microcode on the specified tape
controller. x identifies the tape controller.
CI-n loads microcode on the specified CI interface.
n is the interface number.
NI-n loads microcode on the specified NI interface.
n is the interface number.
3-26
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
CONFIG COMMANDS
Examples
1. Use the LOAD command to load microcode on CI interface 0.
CONFIG>LOAD CI-0<RET>
CONFIG>
16:55:39 CONFIG -- LOAD microcode --
Microcode loaded on CPU0, device 574, unit 0
CONFIG>
2. USE the LOAD command to load microcode on tape controller
MTA.
CONFIG>LOAD MTA
CONFIG>
16:56:23 CONFIG -- LOAD microcode --
Microcode loaded on CPU0, device 554, unit 0.
CONFIG>
3-27
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
CONFIG COMMANDS
REMOVE
Function
The REMOVE command removes the following devices from the system:
o devices
o disk controllers
o tape controllers
o CI (Computer Interconnect) interface
o NI (Network Interconnect) interface
o CPUs
o memory
Format
CONFIG>REMOVE keyword argument<RET>
Keywords
ALL-CI removes all CI interfaces.
ALL-NI removes all NI interfaces.
CPUn removes the specified CPU from the system.
n is the CPU number.
Rxy removes the specified disk controller from the
system. xy is the disk controller
identification.
MTx removes the specified tape controller from the
system. x is the tape controller
identification.
CI-n removes the specified CI interface from the
system. n is the interface number. If you
have more than one CI interface, the keyword
list includes ALL-CI as an option.
3-28
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
CONFIG COMMANDS
NI-n removes the specified NI interface from the
system. n is the NI interface number. If you
have more than one NI interface, the keyword
list inclues ALL-NI as an option.
device specifies the device being removed.
MEMORY nn to nn removes the specified range of memory from the
total system configuration. You can specify
the range as octal or decimal. To specify an
octal address, include a pound sign (#) before
the number. For example,
#nn specifies an octal address
nn specifies a decimal address
The default unit of memory is words, however,
you can specify the memory unit in pages or
kilowords (blocks of 1024 words). To specify
pages, add the letter "P" to the number.
Include the letter "K" to the number to
specify kilowords. For example,
nnP specifies pages
nnK specifies kilowords
Examples
1. Use the REMOVE command to remove CPU1 from the system.
CONFIG>REMOVE CPU1<RET>
CONFIG>
16:56:58 CONFIG -- REMOVE CPU --
The following structures must be dismounted:
BLKY on RPG0
CPU1 can't be removed
CONFIG>
Use the DISMOUNT command to dismount and remove structure
BLKY and reissue the REMOVE command.
2. Use the REMOVE command to remove memory from 768K to 512K.
CONFIG>REMOVE MEMORY 768K 512K<RET>
CONFIG>
16:57:56 CONFIG -- REMOVE MEMORY --
Memory from address 512K to 768K is now offline
(Words from 2000000 to 3000000)
CONFIG>
3-29
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
CONFIG COMMANDS
RETURN
Function
The RETURN command exits the CONFIG command subset and returns
you to OPR command level.
Format
CONFIG>RETURN<RET>
OPR>
3-30
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
CONFIG COMMANDS
SET
Function
The SET command allows you to do the following:
o specify KLINIK parameters
o enable and disable automatic reloading of the monitor after
certain stopcodes
o specify the BOOT-TEXT command string
o enable and disable continuable dumps after certain stopcodes
Format
CONFIG>SET keyword arguments<RET>
Keywords
AUTO-RELOAD automatically reloads the monitor after the
monitor crashes or has been down.
BOOT-TEXT specifies the BOOT-TEXT command string. The
BOOT-TEXT command string is the command string
passed to the bootstrap on an automatic
monitor reload.
DUMP causes the monitor to take continuable dumps
after the specified stopcodes.
IGNORE argument causes the monitor device service routine to
ignore on-line interrupts from the specified
device until you enter a SET NO IGNORE
command.
KLINIK sets KLINIK parameters for the specified CPU.
If you do not specify a CPU, SET KLINIK sets
the parameters for all CPUs. This keyword has
a subcommand level, described below.
MICROCODE enables automatic reload of microcode.
3-31
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
CONFIG COMMANDS
NO
AUTO-RELOAD disables automatic reload of the monitor.
When NO AUTO-RELOAD is in effect, BOOT prompts
you for reloading commands.
DUMP clears the current stopcode settings for
continuable dumps.
IGNORE disables ignoring on-line interrupts.
MICROCODE disables automatic reload of microcode.
RELOAD disables reloading of the monitor after the
specified type of stopcode.
POLICY-CPU sets the policy CPU to be CPUn.
RELOAD enables reloading of the monitor after the
specified type of stopcode.
BOOT-TEXT Argument
command-string specifies the command string
passed to the bootstrap on an automatic
monitor reload. Because the bootstrap
interprets a space as an end-of-command
character, you can specify multiple commands
on the same line by separating the commands
with spaces. The command string starts with
the first non-space, non-tab character after
the keyword "BOOT-TEXT", and ends when you
press <RET>.
NOTE
The bootstrap does not automatically
dump the memory image unless you
specify the /D bootstrap command as
the first element of the argument.
3-32
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
CONFIG COMMANDS
DUMP, NO DUMP, RELOAD, and NO RELOAD Arguments
CPU-STOPCODES control dump-writing when CPU type stopcodes
occur.
DEBUG-STOPCODES
control dump-writing when DEBUG type stopcodes
occur.
JOB-STOPCODES control dump-writing when JOB type stopcodes
occur.
KLINIK Arguments
ALL-CPUs sets KLINIK parameters for all CPUs. This is
the default.
CPUn sets KLINIK parameters for the specified CPU.
Press RETURN to enter KLINIK subcommand level. KLINIK prompts
for the mode to set the KLINIK link. For example:
OPR>SET KLINIK<RET>
KLINIK link:
You must supply one of the following:
OFF shuts off the KLINIK links currently open.
REMOTE specifies the link will act as a remote system
CTY.
USER specifies the link will have ordinary
timesharing user status.
If you type USER, you must specify the date and time when the
link is available. For example:
KLINIK mode: USER<RET>
Access window OPEN date-time: DATE:TIME
Access window CLOSED date-time: DATE:TIME
CONFIG>
If you press RETURN to the OPEN prompt, the default is now. The
date and time format is: DD-MMM-YY:HH:MM:SS
3-33
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
CONFIG COMMANDS
If you type REMOTE, you must specify a password, open and close
date-times, and the console mode accessible to the user of the
link. For example:
KLINIK mode: REMOTE<RET>
Password:<RET>
Access window OPEN date-time: DATE:TIME
Access window CLOSED date-time: DATE:TIME
Highest console mode:<RET>
CONFIG>
The console mode can be one of the following:
MAINTENANCE
OPERATOR
PROGRAMMER
If you press RETURN to the console prompt, the default is
OPERATOR.
The state of the KLINIK link is reported by OPR after any
changes. For more information about KLINIK links and the console
modes, refer to the TOPS-10/20 RSX-20F System Reference Manual.
MICROCODE and NO MICROCODE arguments:
Rxy controls reloading microcode on specified CPU.
MTx controls reloading microcode on specified
Magtape.
CI-n controls reloading microcode on specified CI.
NI-n controls reloading microcode on specified NI.
3-34
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
CONFIG COMMANDS
Examples
1. Use the SET command to specify a BOOT-TEXT command string
that dumps the memory image and reloads the monitor.
CONFIG>SET BOOT-TEXT /D DSKA:SYSTEM.EXE[1,4]<RET>
CONFIG>
14:32:55 CONFIG -- SET BOOTXT --
Boot-text setting accepted. New boot string is:
/D DSKA:SYSTEM.EXE[1,4]
CONFIG>
2. Use the SET NO AUTO-RELOAD command to disable automatic
reload of the monitor.
CONFIG>SET NO AUTO-RELOAD<RET>
CONFIG>
15:16:07 CONFIG -- SET AUTO-RELOAD --
Automatic system reload is disabled
CONFIG>
3-35
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
CONFIG COMMANDS
SHOW
Function
The SHOW command displays information about the current KLINIK
and STOPCODE-FLAGS settings. See the SET command for more
information about KLINIK and STOPCODE-FLAG settings.
Format
CONFIG>SHOW keyword<RET>
Keywords
BOOT-TEXT displays the BOOT-TEXT command string. The
BOOT-TEXT command string is the command string
passed to the bootstrap on an automatic
monitor reload.
HARDWARE-CONFIGURATION
displays information about currently active
CPUs, and monitor memory, physical memory, and
CI configurations.
KLINIK displays information about the current KLINIK
window settings.
STOPCODE-FLAGS displays information about the current
stopcode flag settings.
Switches for HARDWARE-CONFIGURATION only
/CI displays information about the CI (Computer
Interconnect) configuration only.
/CONTROLLER-MICROCODES
displays information about the controller
microcodes only.
/CPU displays information about CPU configuration
only.
/DISK displays information about disk configuration
only.
3-36
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
CONFIG COMMANDS
/DTE displays information about the DTE
configuration only.
/MONITOR-MEMORY displays information about monitor memory
configuration only.
/NI displays information about NI (Ethernet)
configuration only.
/TAPE displays information about magnetic tape
configuration only.
/UNIT-RECORD displays information about unit record device
(card-reader) configuration only.
Examples
1. Use the SHOW command to display information about the current
KLINIK window settings.
CONFIG>SHOW KLINIK<RET>
CONFIG>
11:11:26 CONFIG -- KLINIK Status --
-- CPU0 KLINIK Status --
Access window open
Window opened on 07-Jan-88 at 10:50:02
Window closes on 16-Feb-89 at 23:59:58
KLINIK mode: REMOTE Console mode: MAINTENANCE
-- CPU1 KLINIK Status --
Access window closed
-- CPU2 KLINIK Status --
Access window closed
CONFIG>
2. Use the SHOW command to display information about the current
stopcode flag settings.
CONFIG>SHOW STOPCODE-FLAGS<RET>
CONFIG>
11:17:43 CONFIG -- SHOW STOPCODE-FLAGS --
System will do continuable dumps on CPU, DEBUG, and JOB stopcodes
System will reload on STOP stopcodes
CONFIG>
3-37
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
CONFIG COMMANDS
SHUTDOWN
Function
The SHUTDOWN command takes the monitor down with a reload (RLD)
stopcode, and reloads the monitor. You must supply a single-line
reason for the reload when you use the SHUTDOWN command. CONFIG
stores the address of the reason string in AC 0. The reason for
the dump can later be determined by examining user AC 0.
NOTE
To prevent accidental use of the SHUTDOWN
command, OPR does not permit you to abbreviate
the command, or to press <ESC> to complete the
command.
Format
CONFIG>SHUTDOWN reason<RET>
Example
Use the SHUTDOWN command to take down the monitor to clear a hung
tape system.
CONFIG>SHUTDOWN CLEAR HUNG TAPE SYSTEM<RET>
3-38
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
CONFIG COMMANDS
SNAPSHOT
Function
The SNAPSHOT command executes a stopcode, dumps the system memory
image, and continues the system automatically.
You must supply a single-line reason for the snapshot when you
use the SNAPSHOT command. CONFIG stores the address of the
reason string in AC 0. The reason for the dump can later be
determined by examining user AC 0.
NOTE
To prevent accidental use of the SNAPSHOT
command, OPR does not permit you to abbreviate
the command, or to press <ESC> to complete the
command.
Format
CONFIG>SNAPSHOT reason<RET>
Example
Use the SNAPSHOT command to obtain a dump of the system memory
image.
CONFIG>SNAPSHOT SYSTEM HUNG<RET>
CONFIG>
17:00:33 CONFIG -- SNAPSHOT --
CONFIG>
3-39
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
CONFIG COMMANDS
SUSPEND
Function
The SUSPEND command suspends system operation and writes a system
dump file. You can later reload the dump file with the
BOOT/REBOOT switch and continue the system. You must supply a
single-line reason for suspending the system when you use the
SUSPEND command. CONFIG stores the address of the reason string
in AC 0. The reason for the dump can later be determined by
examining user AC 0. You must perform all logical software
reconfiguration that is needed before a system is suspended.
To record system configuration before suspension, you can use the
SHOW HARDWARE-CONFIGURATION command. Then use SUSPEND to suspend
system operations.
NOTE
To prevent accidental use of the SUSPEND command,
OPR does not permit you to abbreviate the command
or to press <ESC> to complete the command.
See the TOPS-10 Operator's Guide for more information about
SUSPEND.
Format
CONFIG>SUSPEND reason<RET>
You must supply a text string indicating the "reason" for the
suspension.
Examples
Suspend system operation in order to perform corrective
maintenance.
1. Display the current configuration using the SHOW
HARDWARE-CONFIGURATION command.
CONFIG>SHOW HARDWARE-CONFIGURATION
CONFIG>
14:24:24
CONFIG -- SHOW HARDWARE-CONFIGURATION --
CPU Configuration
CPU0 is running and scheduling jobs
KL10 model B serial number 1026, microcode version 442
3-40
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
CONFIG COMMANDS
Hardware options:
MCA25 cache/pager Extended addressing Internal channels
Cache
Cache status: Enabled
Internal channels:
0: RH20 1: RH20 2: RH20 3: N/C
4: N/C 5: NIA20 6: N/C 7: CI20
DTE configuration:
DTE0: up CFE running RSX20F version VA15-50
Reload enable: ON Retry enable: ON Fault-continuation: ON
DTE1: up DN60 running DN60
DTE2: up DN87S running ANF10 node NOVA(31)
DTE3: down
CFE UNIBUS Configuration:
CSR Device CSR Associated Device
------ --------------------- ------ --------------------
172100 MF11-UP Mem Parity
177340 TC11 DECtape Control
176700 RH11 Disk Control
.
.
.
Monitor Memory Configuration
Monitor configured for 4096P (2048K) of physical memory
Controller Microcodes
Controller Version
---------- -----------
DX10/TX01 15(0)
DX20/TX02 10(74)
DX20/RP20 3(1)
CI20 1A(733)
NIA20 1(172)
CI Configuration
Node S/W type S/W vers H/W type
------------- -------- -------- --------
00 (KL-1026) T-10 0703 KL10
02 (KL-1322) T-10 0703 KL10
06 (HSC006) HSC V350 HS50
09 (HSC009) HSC V350 HS50
11 (KL-1042) T-10 0703 KL10
13 (KL-2476) T-10 0703 KL10
NI Configuration
Chan/Kont State E-net Address
--------- ------- -----------------
ETH-0 Online AA-00-04-00-6E-1C
NI-0 Online AA-00-03-03-00-13
NI-1 Online AA-00-03-03-00-87
NI-2 Online 08-00-2B-00-13-BC
Disk Configuration
Drive Type Str Volume CPU(s) Controller
------ ---- ---- ------ ------ ----------
RAJ1 RA81 012 HSC-9
RAG1 RA81 HSC-6
3-41
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
CONFIG COMMANDS
RPE0 RP06 1322 13220 2 RH20-0 (540)
.
.
.
Tape Configuration
Drive Type Volume CPU(s) Controller(s)
------ ------ ------ ------ -------------
MTA260 TU70 0 DX10-0 (220)
MTA261 TU70 0 DX10-0 (220)
MTA262 TU70 0 DX10-0 (220)
.
.
.
DECtape configuration
Device CPU
------ ---
DTA260 0
DTA261 0
DTA262 0
DTA263 0
Unit Record Device Configuration
Card reader configuration:
Device CPU
------ ---
CDR260 2
Line printer configuration:
Device CPU Type Status
------ --- ----- ------
LPT260 1 LP100 Online
2. SUSPEND the system.
CONFIG>SUSPEND FIX MEMORY<RET>
;;SYSTEM: - Expect an interruption of service
;;SYSTEM: - Suspending system operation
[Suspending system on DSKF:CRASH.EXE[1,4]]
[System suspended] The system is suspended.
All other CPUs in an SMP
system should now be
HALTed.
Note that SMP systems must
be REBOOTed on the CPU
that was the policy CPU
when the system was
suspended.
RSX-20F VE##-## 8:57 26-Mar-86 RSX-20F version and
creation time and date.
3-42
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
CONFIG COMMANDS
[SYO: redirected to DBO:] DBO: is the system device
[DBO: mounted] for the RSX-20F tasks.
KLI -- VERSION VA##-## RUNNING KLINIT prints this and
KLI -- KL10 S/N: 2996., MODEL B, 60 HERTZ the following lines.
KLI -- KL10 HARDWARE ENVIRONMENT
MCA25 CACHE PAGER
MOS MASTER OSCILLATOR
EXTENDED ADDRESSING
INTERNAL CHANNELS
CACHE
KLI -- PAGE TABLE SELECTED: BOTH
KLI -- MICROCODE VERSION #.#[###] LOADED
KLI -- ALL CACHES ENABLED
KLI -- % MOS MEMORY IS ALREADY CONFIGURED
LOGICAL MEMORY CONFIGURATION
ADDRESS SIZE INT TYPE CONTROLLER
00000000 768K 4 MF20 10
03000000 768K 4 MF20 11
KLI -- CONFIGURATION FILE WRITTEN
KLI -- BOOTSTRAP LOADED AND STARTED KLINIT has loaded and
started BOOT.
BOOT V#(##) BOOT version number.
BOOT>/REBOOT<RET> Type /REBOOT and press
RETURN to reload the
default monitor from the
file DSKF:CRASH.EXE[1,4].
[Reloading from DSKF:CRASH.EXE[1,4]] BOOT is now reloading the
monitor.
Date:3-Sep-88 Before answering the date
prompt, start other SMP
system CPUs using the JUMP
400 PARSER command.
Time:1150
CONFIG>
;;SYSTEM: - System resumed
CONFIG>
3-43
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
LCP COMMANDS
3.5 LCP COMMANDS
The LAT Control Program (LCP) allows you to control and monitor LAT
activity. For example, LCP commands:
o Clear LAT parameters.
o Set LAT parameters.
o Show the current parameters, terminal connections, counter
and server information.
o Change various counter settings to zero.
This section describes the keywords, arguments, and switches to the
LCP commands listed below.
o CLEAR
o SET
o SHOW
o START
o STOP
o ZERO
See the TOPS-10 Operator's Guide for more information about
controlling LAT devices.
For more information about LAT architecture, and LAT Terminal Server
configuration guidelines, see the Local Area Transport (LAT)
Architecture Network Manager's Guide.
3-44
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
LCP COMMANDS
CLEAR
Function
The CLEAR command resets parameters specified with the SET
command. Note that you cannot clear parameters for NODE-NAME, or
host NUMBER. See the SET command for more information about
these parameters.
Format
LCP>CLEAR keyword argument<RET>
Keywords
GROUPS clears the current GROUPS setting. You can
clear the current setting for single groups or
a range of groups. For example:
CLEAR GROUPS n
CLEAR GROUPS n:m
IDENTIFICATION clears all additional host identification
information.
MAXIMUM
ACTIVE-CIRCUITS
changes to 10 the maximum number of
active-circuits that can exist at a node.
SESSIONS resets the maximum number of active LAT
terminals allowed to connect to the local
host. The reset value defaults to the number
of remote terminals you specify in the NETGEN
section of the MONGEN dialog. See the TOPS-10
Software Installation Guide for more
information about MONGEN.
MULTICAST-TIMER clears the current number of seconds set for
the multicast timer, and sets the new number
to 30 seconds. The multicast timer specifies
the interval at which a host will transmit a
multicast message announcing the availability
of the LAT Terminal Service.
NUMBER specifies a unique host identification number.
3-45
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
LCP COMMANDS
RETRANSMIT
TIMER resets the retransmit timer to 1000
milliseconds. The retransmit timer specifies
number of milliseconds before the host
retransmits any unacknowledged messages to the
server.
LIMIT resets to 60 the number of times that a LAT
host retransmits any unacknowledged messages
to the server. After the last message
transmission, the host detaches all jobs
associated with the virtual circuit.
SERVICE-NAME service-name
clears the types of services that a host
offers to terminal users at a LAT server. The
CLEAR SERVICE-NAME command also clears any
RATING or additional identification
information associated with the service name.
Arguments
nn specifies a number from 0 to 255.
n:m specifies a range of numbers from 0 to 255.
text specifies a text string.
service-name specifies a service name for CLEAR
SERVICE-NAME.
Examples
1. Use the CLEAR command to clear the current GROUPS setting for
all groups in the range of 30 to 40 and for group 53.
LCP>CLEAR GROUPS 30:40,53<RET>
LCP>
9:24:47 LCP -- Clear Accepted --
LCP>
3-46
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
LCP COMMANDS
2. Use the CLEAR command to reset the maximum number of active
LAT terminals allowed to connect to the local host.
LCP>CLEAR MAXIMUM SESSIONS<RET>
LCP>
9:25:15 LCP -- Clear Accepted --
LCP>
3-47
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
LCP COMMANDS
RETURN
Function
The RETURN command exits the LCP command subset and returns you
to OPR command level.
Format
LCP>RETURN<RET>
OPR>
3-48
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
LCP COMMANDS
SET
Function
The SET command specifies various LCP parameters. You can clear
the current settings for all of the following parameters except
host NUMBER. See the CLEAR command for information about
clearing current settings.
Format
LCP>SET keyword argument /switch<RET>
Keywords
GROUPS specifies a range of group numbers, or a
single group number. You can specify any
combination of ranges or single numbers,
separated by commas. For example:
SET GROUPS n:m, nn, n2:m2<RET>
IDENTIFICATION specifies host identification information.
The identification text may be up to 64
characters long, and may contain any printable
character.
MAXIMUM
ACTIVE-CIRCUITS
sets the maximum number of active circuits
that can exist at a node at one time.
SESSIONS sets the maximum number of active LAT
terminals allowed to connect to the local
host. The default value is the number of
remote terminals you specify in the NETGEN
section of the MONGEN dialog. See the TOPS-10
Software Installation Guide for more
information about MONGEN.
MULTICAST-TIMER sets the interval at which a host will
transmit to all servers a multicast message
announcing the availability of the LAT
terminal service. The multicast timer default
is 30 seconds.
NUMBER specifies a unique host identification number.
3-49
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
LCP COMMANDS
RETRANSMIT
TIMER sets the number of milliseconds before the
host retransmits any unacknowledged messages
to the server. The default is 1000
milliseconds.
LIMIT sets the maximum number of times that a LAT
host retransmits any unacknowledged messages
to the server. After the last message
transmission, the host detaches all jobs
associated with the virtual circuit. The
default is 60 retransmissions.
SERVICE-NAME specifies the types of services a host offers
to terminal users at a LAT server. The
service name may contain the following
characters: any alphanumeric characters, as
well as the $ (dollar sign), - (dash), or _
(underscore).
Arguments
nn specifies a number from 0 to 255.
n:m specifies a range of numbers from 0 to 255.
text specifies a text string.
Switches for SERVICE-NAME only
/RATING: specifies the host's service rating. The
rating may be a fixed number in the range
0-255, or it may be the word "DYNAMIC". The
higher the rating, the more accessible that
host is to the LAT terminal server. The
DYNAMIC rating changes according to machine
availability.
/IDENTIFICATION: specifies a service description of up to 64
characters. You must include quotes around
the service description you specify. For
example:
LCP>SET SERVICE-NAME JEEVES/IDENTIFICATION:"FOO"
3-50
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
LCP COMMANDS
Examples
1. Use the SET command to set to 200 the maximum number of
active LAT terminals allowed to connect to the local host.
LCP>SET MAXIMUM SESSIONS 200<RET>
LCP>
9:25:33 LCP -- Set Accepted --
LCP>
2. Use the SET command to specify host identification
information.
LCP>SET IDENTIFICATION "BIG SYSTEM"<RET>
LCP>
9:27:07 LCP -- Set Accepted --
LCP>
3. Use the SET command to set to 10 the maximum number of active
circuits that can exist at a node.
LCP>SET MAXIMUM ACTIVE-CIRCUITS 10<RET>
LCP>
9:28:15 LCP -- Set Accepted --
LCP>
4. Use the SET command to set the host's service name, service
rating, and service description.
LCP>SET SERVICE-NAME MACHO/RATING:55/IDENTIFICATION:"Best"<RET>
LCP>
9:31:13 LCP -- Set Accepted --
LCP>
3-51
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
LCP COMMANDS
SHOW
Function
The SHOW command displays the following LAT information:
o Dynamic and permanent parameters
o Currently active terminal connections
o Server information
o Counter information
Format
LCP>SHOW keyword /switch <RET>
Keywords
CHARACTERISTICS displays the dynamic parameters and many of
the permanent LAT parameters.
COUNTERS displays the counter totals for all servers on
the system. To display the counters for a
particular server, use the /SERVER switch and
supply a server name.
HOST-INITIATED-REQUESTS
displays all the currently active outgoing LAT
connections.
PENDING-REQUESTS displays all the currently pending outgoing
LAT connections.
SERVER server-name
displays the servers that have connected to
the local LAT host. SHOW SERVER/ALL displays
a summary of server information including the
server name, number and Ethernet address.
SHOW SERVER followed by a server name displays
additional information about the specified
server including the server location, type,
status and timers.
3-52
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
LCP COMMANDS
SESSIONS displays information about the current LAT
terminal sessions including:
o Job
o Line
o Program
o Server name
o User
Switch for COUNTERS and SERVER only
/SERVER:server-name
displays counters for the specified server.
Argument
server-name specifies the server for which to display
information. The server-name argument applies
only to the SHOW COUNTERS and SHOW SERVER
command.
3-53
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
LCP COMMANDS
Examples
1. Use the SHOW command to display the dynamic and permanent LAT
parameters.
LCP>SHOW CHARACTERISTICS<RET>
LCP>
9:27:21 LCP -- Host Characteristics --
LAT Access State: ON
Host Name: KL1026
Host id: RLT17QM KL1026 AP Monitor
Host Number: 0
Retransmit Limit: 60
Retransmit Timer: 1000
Multicast Timer: 30
Groups: 3:4,7,10,14,18,21
Current Maximum
------- -------
Allocated circuits 3 20
Active circuits 3 20
Sessions 6 200
Service name Rating Identification
------------ ------ ------------------------
KL1026 1 RLT17Q KL1026 AP Monitor
TOPS10 1 TOPS-10 Development System
LCP>
2. Use the SHOW command to display the counter totals for all
servers on the system.
LCP>SHOW COUNTERS<RET>
LCP>
9:32:38 LCP -- Counter Totals for All Servers --
Messages received: 12664
Messages transmitted: 13659
Messages retransmitted: 31
Sequence errors received: 216
Illegal messages received: 0
Illegal slots received: 0
Resource failures: 0
LCP>
3-54
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
LCP COMMANDS
3. Use the SHOW command to display information about server
LAT9.
LCP>SHOW SERVER LAT9<RET>
LCP>
9:33:26 LCP -- Information About Server LAT9 --
Server Number: 98
Server Location: MRO1-2/L5
Server Type: DECserver-100
Ethernet Address: 08-00-2B-00-17-DF
Server Status: Connected
Max Slots: 48
Data Link Size: 1518
Circuit Timer(ms): 80
Keep-alive Timer(s): 20
LCP>
4. Use the SHOW command to display information about current LAT
terminal sessions.
LCP>SHOW SESSIONS<RET>
LCP>
9:33:57 LCP -- Active LAT Sessions --
Job Line Program Server Name Port Name User
--- ---- ------- ----------- ------------- -----------------
36 75 MS LAT93 JFRANCIS FRANCIS [30,224]
22 76 PIP LAT1 TZIEDZIC ZIEDZIC [30,6601]
24 77 DIRECT LAT1 SENDLOSK LUS [10,4601]
27 100 QUEUE LAT87 SPERKINS PERK [30,2216]
29 103 STECO LAT98 BFROEM FROEM [30,6026]
30 104 DC LAT94 JOANNCREEL JCREEL [30,5653]
26 105 QUEUE LAT1 DAVIDLUND LUND [10,5451]
LCP>
3-55
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
LCP COMMANDS
START
Function
The START command notifies all servers that the host is
available, and sets the LAT-ACCESS-STATE to ON. See the STOP
command for information about restricting access to the local
host.
Format
LCP>START<RET>
Example
Use the START command to make the host available to all terminal
servers.
LCP>START<RET>
LCP>
8:33:56 LCP -- Start Accepted --
LCP>
3-56
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
LCP COMMANDS
STOP
Function
The STOP command terminates all existing LAT terminal sessions
and rejects any new connections from servers. See the START
command for information on permitting access to the local host.
Format
LCP>STOP<RET>
Example
Use the STOP command to terminate all existing LAT terminal
sessions.
LCP>STOP<RET>
LCP>
8:34:41 LCP -- Stop Accepted --
LCP>
3-57
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
LCP COMMANDS
ZERO COUNTERS
Function
The ZERO COUNTERS command changes the counters for the combined
LAT server totals to zero. This command does not affect the
counters for the individual servers unless you use the /SERVER:
switch and specify a particular server.
Format
LCP>ZERO COUNTERS /switch <RET>
Switch
/SERVER:server-name
sets the counters for a particular server to
zero. This switch does not affect the
counters for the combined server totals. You
must specify a server name with this switch.
Argument
server-name specifies the server on which the counters
should be set to zero.
Examples
1. Use the ZERO COUNTERS command to change the counters for the
combined LAT server totals to zero.
LCP>ZERO COUNTERS<RET>
LCP>
9:35:47 LCP -- Zero Accepted --
LCP>
2. Use the ZERO COUNTERS command to change the counters for
server LAT9.
LCP>ZERO COUNTERS/SERVER:LAT9<RET>
LCP>
9:36:26 LCP -- Zero Accepted --
LCP>
3-58
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
NCP COMMANDS
3.6 NCP COMMANDS
This section provides information about the Network Control Program
(NCP) command subset. It is a quick reference guide for experienced
NCP users. If you have never used NCP, please see the TOPS-10 DECnet
and PSI System Manager's and Operator's Guide before you use any NCP
commands.
NCP's two main functions are to control and monitor DECnet network
activity. Some of the tasks you perform with NCP include:
o Changing parameters
o Monitoring local and remote DECnet nodes
o Loading and starting adjacent nodes
o Gathering information about the DECnet network
WARNING
Some NCP commands have the potential to disrupt the
entire network. Several commands will, if formatted
with valid but ill-chosen parameters, disrupt your own
node's performance. Never enter an NCP command
without a complete understanding of the probable
effect of the command. Do not make changes in the
permanent data base of a remote node without
consulting the system manager at the remote node.
The following table briefly describes the NCP commands.
3-59
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
NCP COMMANDS
Table 3-1: NCP Commands
______________________________________________________________________
Command Function
______________________________________________________________________
CANCEL Removes a command from the request queue before
processing begins.
CLEAR Removes a value previously entered in the volatile
data base.
DEFINE Enters a value in the permanent data base.
DUMP Stores a copy of a target node's memory image in a
dump file at the host node.
HELP Returns a function and major keywords for all NCP
commands.
LIST Displays, on the user's terminal, information from
the permanent data base.
LOAD Allows the executor node to load the system image
file to a remote node adjacent to the executor.
LOOP Requests a node-level loopback test.
PURGE Removes a value or values from the permanent data
base.
SET Enters a value or values in the volatile data
base.
SHOW Displays on the user's terminal information from
the volatile data base.
TELL(prefix) Directs the command that follows to a remote node
for execution.
TRIGGER Requests the target node to send a load request.
ZERO Logs counters and then zeros them.
______________________________________________________________________
3-60
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
QUOTA COMMANDS
3.7 QUOTA COMMANDS
The QUOTA application in OPR enables you to maintain disk space quota
entries in the QUOTA.SYS file and in ACTDAE.SYS. QUOTA.SYS contains a
list of users for the private structure on which the users' files
reside. Creating entries in ACTDAE.SYS causes LOGIN to mount the
specified structures. System Administrator privileges are required.
With QUOTA, you can do the following:
o create a user's quota
o delete a user's quota
o list a user's quota
o change a user's quota
o display a user's quota
NOTE
You must have SYSTEM operator privileges to use the
QUOTA application. SYSTEM operator privileges allow
you to control devices and tasks on the host system
and remote nodes.
3-61
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
QUOTA COMMANDS
ADD
Function
The ADD command creates entries in QUOTA.SYS or ACTDAE.SYS. If
you specify the /MOUNT switch, QUOTA writes the entry in
ACTDAE.SYS. If you do not specify the /MOUNT switch, QUOTA
writes the entry in <STRUCTURE>:QUOTA.SYS[1,4].
Format
QUOTA>ADD userid structure quota-in quota-out /switches<RET>
userid specifies a user's project-programmer number,
or a user name. You must include quotes
around a user name if it contains
non-alphabetic characters. Both the
project-programmer number and the user name
may include wildcards.
structure specifies a device name, which can be any
structure name.
quota-in
quota-out specifies a user's logged-in or logged-out
quota in 128-word blocks. You may specify the
quota as one of the following:
o a positive decimal number
o the word INFINITE to indicate the largest
possible 36-bit integer.
Switches
/MOUNT creates an entry for the specified structure
in ACTDAE.SYS and in the user's LOGIN search
list. If you include the /MOUNT switch, the
structure must be cataloged and accessible.
/NOCREATE sets the NOCREATE status bit when the user
logs in. This bit prohibits the user from
creating files on the structure unless the
user specifies the structure name when
creating a file. The /NOCREATE switch applies
only if you specified the /MOUNT switch.
3-62
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
QUOTA COMMANDS
/NOWRITE write-locks the specified structure for the
specified user's job when the user logs in.
The user will not be able to create files on
the structure. The /NOWRITE switch applies
only if you specified the /MOUNT switch.
Examples
1. Use the ADD command to create an entry in QUOTA.SYS for a
user (JSMITH) on structure RENG with quota-in and quota-out
of 100 blocks.
QUOTA>ADD JSMITH RENG 100 100<RET>
QUOTA>
14:00:59 -- ADD command --
1 entry added
QUOTA>
2. Use the ADD command to create an entry in ACTDAE.SYS in which
the creation of files on the structure is prohibited unless
the user (JSMITH) specifies the structure name when creating
the file.
QUOTA>ADD JSMITH DSKC 1000 100/MOUNT/NOCREATE<RET>
QUOTA>
14:02:29 -- ADD command --
1 entry added
QUOTA>
3-63
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
QUOTA COMMANDS
DELETE
Function
The DELETE command removes entries from QUOTA.SYS and ACTDAE.SYS.
Format
QUOTA>DELETE userid structure<RET>
userid specifies a user's project-programmer number,
or a user name. You must include quotes
around a user name if it contains
non-alphabetic characters. Both the
project-programmer number and the user name
may include wildcards.
structure specifies a device name, which can be any
structure name.
Example
Use the DELETE command to remove entries of user JSMITH,
structure RENG, from QUOTA.SYS and ACTDAE.SYS.
QUOTA>DELETE JSMITH RENG<RET>
QUOTA>
14:02:48 -- DELETE command --
1 entry deleted
QUOTA>
3-64
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
QUOTA COMMANDS
HELP
Function
The HELP command displays information about QUOTA commands.
Format
QUOTA>HELP command<RET>
where command is any QUOTA command.
Examples
1. Use the HELP command to get more information about HELP.
QUOTA>HELP HELP<RET>
QUOTA>
Obtain help for any QUOTA application command.
The format is this:
HELP command
where <command> can be any one of the following QUOTA
commands:
ADD DELETE HELP
LIST MODIFY SHOW
QUOTA>
2. Use the HELP command to get information about the DELETE
command.
QUOTA>HELP DELETE<RET>
Removes one or more quota entries from the system.
The format is:
DELETE user structure
The <user> specification can be any of the following:
a. A ppn. This ppn can contain wildcards (i.e., * and ?).
b. A quoted username.
c. An unquoted username. This username can contain
wildcards (* and ?).
The <structure> argument can be any valid structure
name. The trailing colon is optional.
QUOTA>
3-65
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
QUOTA COMMANDS
LIST
Function
The LIST command writes a user or structure quota to a file. You
must specify a PPN or username. To list QUOTA.SYS entries,
specify a structure name. To list ACTDAE.SYS entries, specify
the /MOUNT switch.
Format
QUOTA>LIST userid (structure OR /switch) file specification<RET>
userid specifies a user's project-programmer number,
or a user name. You must include quotes
around a user name if it contains
non-alphabetic characters. Both the
project-programmer number and the user name
may include wildcards.
structure specifies a device name, which can be any
structure name. If you specify a structure,
the structure must be accessible. QUOTA lists
only the QUOTA.SYS entries for that structure.
file specification
specifies a file name. The default file
specification is DSK:QUOTA.LST.
Switch
/MOUNT lists ACTDAE.SYS entries.
Examples
1. Use the LIST command to list QUOTA.SYS entries on structure DSKE
for user JSMITH.
QUOTA>LIST JSMITH DSKE<RET>
QUOTA>
14:45:53 -- Listing file written to DSKC:QUOTA.LST[27,5434] --
QUOTA>
3-66
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
QUOTA COMMANDS
2. Use the LIST command to list ACTDAE.SYS entries for user JSMITH.
QUOTA>LIST JSMITH/MOUNT<RET>
QUOTA>
14:04:24 -- Listing file written to DSKB:QUOTA.LST[10,5676] --
QUOTA>
3-67
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
QUOTA COMMANDS
MODIFY
Function
The MODIFY command changes entries in QUOTA.SYS or ACTDAE.SYS.
To change ACTDAE.SYS entries, specify the /MOUNT switch. To
change QUOTA.SYS entries, specify the /NOMOUNT switch.
Format
QUOTA>MODIFY userid structure quota-in quota-out /switches<RET>
userid specifies a user's project-programmer number,
or a user name. You must include quotes
around a user name if it contains
non-alphabetic characters. Both the
project-programmer number and the user name
may include wildcards.
structure specifies a device name, which can be any
structure name. If you include the /NOMOUNT
switch, the structure must be cataloged and
accessible.
quota-in
quota-out specifies a user's logged-in or logged-out
quota in 128-word blocks. You may specify the
quota as one of the following:
o a positive decimal number
o the word INFINITE to indicate the largest
possible 36-bit integer.
o the word SAME to indicate no change to the
quota
Switches
/CREATE clears the NOCREATE status for the specified
entry. The /CREATE switch applies only if you
specified the /MOUNT switch.
/MOUNT modifies an entry for the specified structure
in ACTDAE.SYS and in the user's LOGIN search
list.
3-68
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
QUOTA COMMANDS
/NOMOUNT modifies an entry in the QUOTA.SYS file for
the specified structure. If you create the
entry with the /NOMOUNT switch, the user must
specifically MOUNT the structure; LOGIN does
not automatically try to mount it when the
user logs in.
/NOCREATE sets the NOCREATE status bit when the user
logs in. This bit prohibits the user from
creating files on the structure unless the
user specifies the structure name when
creating a file. The /NOCREATE switch applies
only if you specified the /MOUNT switch.
/NOWRITE write-locks the specified structure for the
specified user's job when the user logs in.
The /NOWRITE switch applies only if you
specified the /MOUNT switch.
/WRITE clears the write-lock status for the specified
entry. The /WRITE switch applies only if you
specified the /MOUNT switch.
Examples
1. Use the MODIFY command to change QUOTA.SYS entries on
structure DSKB for user JSMITH.
QUOTA>MODIFY JSMITH DSKB 100 100/NOMOUNT<RET>
QUOTA>
14:06:17 -- 1 entry modified --
QUOTA>
2. Use the MODIFY command to change ACTDAE.SYS entries on
structure DSKC for user JSMITH.
QUOTA>MODIFY JSMITH DSKC 1000 100/MOUNT<RET>
QUOTA>
15:04:24 -- 1 entry modified --
QUOTA>
3-69
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
QUOTA COMMANDS
RETURN
Function
The RETURN command exits the QUOTA command subset and returns you
to OPR command level.
Format
QUOTA>RETURN<RET>
OPR>
3-70
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
QUOTA COMMANDS
SHOW
Function
The SHOW command displays entries from QUOTA.SYS or ACTDAE.SYS.
To display QUOTA.SYS entries, specify a structure. If you do not
specify a structure, QUOTA displays ACTDAE.SYS entries.
Format
QUOTA>SHOW userid structure <RET>
userid specifies a user's project-programmer number,
or a user name. You must include quotes
around a user name if it contains
non-alphabetic characters. Both the
project-programmer number and the user name
may include wildcards.
structure specifies a device name. The device name can
be any structure name, and the structure must
be accessible. The structure qualifier is
optional. If you specify a structure, QUOTA
displays only the QUOTA.SYS entries for that
structure. If you do not specify a structure,
QUOTA displays user entries from ACTDAE.SYS.
Examples
1. Use the SHOW command to display entries from QUOTA.SYS for user
JSMITH.
QUOTA>SHOW JSMITH DSKB<RET>
QUOTA>
15:58:04 -- QUOTA listing --
User: JSMITH
10,7777 Quota In: 100 Out: 100
Reserved: 0
QUOTA>
3-71
OPR COMMAND SUBSETS
QUOTA COMMANDS
2. Use the SHOW command to display entries from ACTDAE.SYS for user
JSMITH.
QUOTA>SHOW JSMITH<RET>
QUOTA>
14:06:06 -- QUOTA listing --
10,7777 JSMITH
Structure Quota in Quota out Reserved Status
--------- -------- --------- --------- ---------
DSKC 80000 20000 0
DSKZ 10000 1000 0
DSKE 1000 100 0 /NOCREATE
QUOTA>
3-72
CHAPTER 4
TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS
The commands in this chapter change various system parameters and,
therefore, are restricted to users who are logged in under [1,2],
only. All commands, when executed, leave the terminal in monitor
mode. Chapter 5 describes the operator-privileged commands for the
OPSER system program.
4-1
TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS
4.1 ATTACH CPU
Function
The ATTACH CPU command adds the specified CPU and all the devices
on that CPU to the system.
NOTE
The CONFIG ADD command performs extensive system
monitoring and is preferred for adding CPUs to a
system.
Format
ATTACH CPU argument<RET>
Argument
n specifies a logical or physical CPU name.
Example
Use the ATTACH CPU command to add CPU1 and all devices on CPU1 to
the system.
.ATTACH CPU1<RET>
.
4-2
TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS
4.2 ATTACH DEVICE
Function
The ATTACH device command returns a previously DETACHed device to
your control. You can then ASSIGN the device for your own use,
or you can DEASSIGN the device in order to place it in the
monitor pool of available resources.
NOTE
The CONFIG ADD command performs extensive system
monitoring and is preferred for returning
previously detached devices to your control.
Format
ATTACH device
Argument
device specifies the device being attached.
Restrictions
The device must have been previously DETACHed. See the DETACH
command description for more information
Associated messages are:
?No such device
The specified device does not exist at your installation.
?Wasn't detached
The specified device is not detached.
4-3
TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS
Example
You ATTACH tape drive MTA2 that was previously DETACHed.
.ATTACH MTA2<RET>
.
After you have ATTACHed a tape drive, you must then set the tape
drive available with the OPR command SET TAPE-DRIVE. See the OPR
command SET TAPE-DRIVE for more information.
To confirm the attachment of the device, your OPR terminal
replies with:
OPR> 12:35:12 Device MTA2 -- Attached --
OPR>
4-4
TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS
4.3 ATTACH DISK-UNIT
Function
The ATTACH disk-unit command designates that the specified disk
unit is now up, and you can MOUNT a structure on it.
Format
ATTACH disk-unit/comment
Argument
disk-unit specifies that the disk unit you want to
declare is available for structure mounts (for
example, DPA2: or RPA1:).
Switch
/comment specifies a line of text whose first two
characters go into the ERROR.SYS file along
with the command as configuration changes (PM
for preventive maintenance, CM for corrective
maintenance).
Restrictions
The unit must have been DETACHed or declared DOWN at system
initialization.
Associated messages are:
?No such device
The disk unit specified does not exist.
4-5
TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS
Example
You ATTACH disk unit RPB1 for system use after it was DETACHed at
system initialization.
.ATTACH RPB1:<RET>
.
To confirm the attachment of the disk unit, your OPR terminal
replies with:
OPR>
1:20:19 Device RPB1 -- Attached --
OPR>
4-6
TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS
4.4 ATTACH JOB
Function
The ATTACH job command detaches the current job, if any, and
connects the terminal to the job specified as the argument.
Format
ATTACH n[PPN]
Arguments
n specifies the job number of the job to which
the terminal is to be attached.
[PPN] specifies the project-programmer number of the
originator of the desired job. This argument
can be omitted if it is the same as the
project-programmer number of the job to which
the terminal is currently attached. When you
are logged-in under [1,2], you can always
attach to a job, provided that the proper
[PPN] is specified.
Any other user, even one with operator
privileges but not logged-in under [1,2], is
interrogated for the appropriate password.
Restrictions
Associated messages are:
?Not a job
The job number specified does not exist.
?Can't attach to job
The [PPN] was not correct for the job number.
4-7
TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS
Example
You are requested by a user to kill his job. You ATTACH to his
job, kill the job, and then ATTACH back to your job. When you
attach back to job 4 as an operator, you are asked for the
password because the user with job 17 does not have operator
privileges and was not logged-in as [1,2].
.ATTACH 17[27,5107]<RET>
From job 4
.KJ<RET>
Job 17 User BROWN,E [27,5107]
Logged-off TTY0 at 10:04:59 on 18-Mar-88
Runtime: 0:10:02, KCS:32, Connect time: 0:49:19
Disk Reads:495, Writes:125, Blocks saved:7040
.ATTACH 4[1,2]<RET>
Password:<RET>
.
4-8
TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS
4.5 DETACH DEVICE
Function
The DETACH device command assigns the specified device to job 0,
thus making it unavailable to any user requesting the device.
NOTE
The CONFIG ADD command performs extensive system
monitoring and is preferred for making devices
unavailable.
Format
DETACH device
Argument
device specifies the name of the device to be DETACHed.
Restrictions
DSK and TTY cannot be detached.
Associated messages are:
?Device in use
The device specified is already in use.
?Device not assignable
The device specified is currently off-line or unavailable.
?Can't detach device
You are attempting to detach a DSK or TTY device.
?No such device
The specified device does not exist.
4-9
TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS
Example
You DETACH tape drive MTA2 because of hardware problems.
.DETACH MTA2<RET>
.
To confirm that the tape drive was detached, your OPR terminal
replies with:
OPR>
3:45:19 Device MTA2 -- Detached --
OPR>
4-10
TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS
4.6 DETACH DISK-UNIT
Function
The DETACH disk-unit command designates the specified disk unit
as being DOWN. This is similar to declaring it DOWN at system
initialization.
Format
DETACH disk-unit/comment
Argument
disk-unit specifies the disk unit that you want to
declare DOWN, for example, DPA0:, RPA4:.
Switch
/comment specifies a line of text whose first two
characters go into the ERROR.SYS file, along
with the command, as Configuration Changes.
(Use PM for preventive maintenance, CM for
corrective maintenance).
Restrictions
The disk unit cannot have a mounted file structure on it. If it
has, you must DISMOUNT the structure first and then DETACH the
disk unit.
Associated messages are:
?No such device
The disk unit specified does not exist.
4-11
TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS
Example
You DETACH disk drive RPB2: as it is inoperable due to hardware
problems.
.DETACH RPB2:<RET>
.
To confirm the detachment of a device, your OPR terminal replies
with:
OPR>
10:57:12 Device RPB2 -- Detached --
OPR>
4-12
TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS
4.7 INITIA
Function
The operator-privileged INITIA command performs the following two
functions:
o It executes SYSJOB.INI, the system startup file that
reinitializes the system.
o It runs the TTY STOMPER program, which disconnects detached
terminals that have been idle for more than two minutes.
Format
INITIA keyword<RET>
Keywords
STOMP runs the TTY STOMPER program to disconnect
detached terminals.
SYSTEM executes SYSJOB.INI, the system startup file.
SYSJOB.INI contains the commands necessary to
start up system programs such as ACTDAE,
FILDAE, QUASAR, and ORION.
Examples
1. Use the INITIA STOMP command to disconnect detached terminals
that have been idle for more than two minutes.
.INITIA STOMP<RET>
%%TTY STOMPER detaching from terminal
.
2. Use the INITIA SYSTEM command to execute the system startup
file that reinitializes the system.
.INITIA SYSTEM<RET>
MONITOR 11:44:06 CTY system 1026
Connected to node CENTR(0) Line 45
.LOGIN 1,2<RET>
.R OPR<RET>
OPR>
4-13
TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS
4.8 SEND
Function
The SEND command sends messages to all terminals on your system
or to all terminals at a specified (ANF-10) network node. A bell
sounds at the destination terminals when your message is
received.
Format
SEND keyword message<RET>
Keywords
ALL specifies that the message be sent to all
terminals on the system.
NODE:identifier specifies that the message be sent to all
terminals on the given node. Your host system
is the default.
Restrictions
The destination terminal does not receive your message if:
o The job is not at monitor command level
o The job has the TTY GAG bit set
o The terminal is in IMAGE mode or Packet Image Mode (PIM)
In addition, if the destination terminal is hardwired and turned
off, your message is not sent. However, it appears to have been
sent because the software cannot detect an OFF condition on
hardwired terminals.
If you try to send a message to a terminal not at monitor command
level, you receive a BUSY message, and your message is not sent.
4-14
TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS
Examples
1. Use the SEND ALL command to notify all users that timesharing
ends in 30 minutes.
OPR>SEND ALL TIMESHARING ENDS IN 30 MINUTES<RET>
OPR>
;;SYSTEM: - TIMESHARING ENDS IN 30 MINUTES
OPR>
2. Use the SEND NODE: command to notify users to stop queuing print
requests because of a problem with the line printer at the
central site.
OPR>SEND NODE:KL1026 DO NOT QUEUE ANY PRINT JOBS UNTIL NOTIFIED<RET>
OPR>
10:39:05 -- SEND Command Completed --
OPR>
4-15
TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS
4.9 SET BREAK
Function
The SET BREAK command makes the address break facility available
to users. It also prevents the address break facility from being
available to users if you wish to make it available to system
programmers for their exclusive use.
The address break facility of the hardware makes a powerful
debugging facility available to users of the system. To make
this feature available, the monitor must set the address where
the user is breaking into the address switches and the break
conditions into the break conditions register.
The default setting when the monitor is loaded is SET BREAK
USERS.
Format
SET BREAK USERS
or
SET BREAK NO USERS
Arguments
USERS specifies that users of the system be given
the address break facility. The system
changes the address switches and break
conditions for programs being debugged using
address break.
NO USERS specifies that the message "?Not available" be
printed on a user's terminal if the user
attempts to use the address break facility.
4-16
TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS
Restriction
The SET BREAK command is not applicable on KS10 systems because
the hardware is not capable of the address break facility.
Associated messages are:
?Not available
You tried to SET BREAK NO USERS, but the address break
facility was already in use by one or more users.
Example
You give the SET BREAK USERS command to allow all users to use
the address break facility.
.SET BREAK USERS<RET>
.
4-17
TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS
4.10 SET CORMAX
Function
The SET CORMAX command changes the system parameter CORMAX. The
largest size that any job (sum of low and high segments) can be
is CORMAX-1.
Format
SET CORMAX n
Argument
n specifies a decimal number representing nK.
The minimum value of n is 10, unless this
value was changed at system generation or
system initialization time.
Example
You set the CORMAX parameter to 256K.
.SET CORMAX 256K<RET>
.
4-18
TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS
4.11 SET CORMIN
Function
The SET CORMIN command changes the system parameter CORMIN.
CORMIN is the guaranteed amount of contiguous core that a single
unlocked job can have. This command is used only with a monitor
that has the capability of locking jobs in core (usually a
real-time monitor).
Format
SET CORMIN n
Argument
n specifies a decimal number representing nK.
Example
You set the CORMIN parameter to 256K.
.SET CORMIN 256K<RET>
.
4-19
TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS
4.12 SET CPU
Function
The SET CPU command specifies which CPU in a multiprocessing
system will run your job. You can specify that processing occur
on the primary CPU, the secondary CPU, or on either CPU.
Format
SET CPU keyword argument<RET>
Arguments
U designates a logical name
L designates a KL processor
n is a number from 0 to 5, depending on the number of
processors in the system.
Keywords
CPxn adds the specified CPU to the list of CPUs
your job can use.
NO CPxn removes the specified CPU from the list of
CPUs your job can use.
CPU ALL adds all of the CPUs to the list of CPUs your
job can use.
ONLY CPxn changes the CPU specification so that it
includes only the specified CPU.
4-20
TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS
Restrictions
The SET CPU command for a particular CPU remains in effect until
one of the following occurs:
o You issue another SET CPU command specifying a different CPU.
o You issue a KJOB command.
o Your program overrides the SET CPU command by issuing the
SETUUO monitor call with a different specification.
The SETUUO monitor call for a particular CPU remains in effect
until one of the following occurs:
o The RESET or EXIT monitor call causes the job to revert to
the CPU specified in the last SET CPU command.
o Another SETUUO monitor call specifies a different CPU.
When you log in, the CPU specification is usually set to ALL.
Each CPU scheduler competes for jobs with the ALL specification
so that the job load is balanced between CPUs. Therefore, you do
not generally need to use the SET CPU.
Examples
1. Your job can run only on CPU1.
.SET CPU ONLY CPU1<RET>
.
2. Your job can run on CPU1.
.SET CPU CPU1<RET>
.
4-21
TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS
4.13 SET DATE
Function
The SET DATE command changes the system date. However, this
command does not check the validity of the date argument, as is
done at system initialization.
To display the current system date, use the monitor command
DAYTIME.
Format
SET DATE mm-dd-yy
Argument
mm-dd-yy specifies the month, day, and year of the date
argument. The month, day, and year are each a
2-character decimal number separated by
hyphens.
Example
You set the date to October 15, 1988 and then display the date
with the DAY command.
.SET DATE 10-15-88<RET>
.DAY<RET>
15-Oct-88 11:25:45
.
4-22
TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS
4.14 SET DAYTIME
Function
The SET DAYTIME command changes the system time of day.
If you need to know the current system's time of day, give the
TOPS-10 command DAYTIME.
Format
SET DAYTIME nnnn
Argument
nnnn specifies a decimal number from 0000 through
2359, representing a 24-hour time. For
example, 1630 as an argument is equal to 4:30
P.M.
Example
You set the time of day to 1815 to correct the system's time.
.SET DAYTIME 1815<RET>
.DAY<RET>
12-Oct-88 18:15:04
.
4-23
TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS
4.15 SET MEMORY
Function
The SET MEMORY command alters the system memory configuration
dynamically without affecting system operation. This command is
most useful for removing faulty memory from the system, returning
repaired memory to the system, or reconfiguring memory on systems
that contain multiple CPUs. If this command is successfully
executed, the specified memory is set on- or off-line.
Format
SET MEMORY ON-LINE FROM n TO m
or
SET MEMORY OFF-LINE FROM n TO m
where FROM and TO are optional portions of the command line.
Argument
n,m specifies the number range (n less than or
equal to m) of the physical addresses that are
to be set ON-or OFF-LINE. The numbers are
treated as decimal, unless preceded by a pound
sign (#) implying octal. If a number is
followed by the letter P or K, the range is in
pages (P) or blocks (K). If neither P nor K
is specified, then K is the default. Refer to
the SET VMMAX command for a further
description of K and P.
4-24
TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS
Restrictions
The SET MEMORY command is operational only on systems that have
the LOCK facility.
Associated messages are:
?ATTEMPT TO SET MONITOR MEMORY OFF-LINE
The range of addresses specified in a SET MEMORY OFF-LINE
command overlaps the resident monitor. The memory occupied
by the resident monitor cannot be set off-line.
?JOB(S) TOO BIG TO CONTINUE TO RUN
?PROBLEM WITH JOB(S) n1[prog1],n2[prog2],...nn[progn]
If the range of addresses specified in a SET MEMORY OFF-LINE
command were taken off-line, the jobs listed would be too
big to continue to run. The job numbers and program names
are listed so that you can ATTACH to the jobs, log them out,
and type the command again if you wish the command to
succeed.
?ATTEMPT TO SET MEMORY CONTAINING LOCKED JOBS OFF-LINE
?PROBLEM WITH JOB(S) n1[prog1],n2[prog2],...nn[progn]
The range of addresses specified in a SET MEMORY OFF-LINE
command overlaps memory containing jobs that are locked in
core. The job numbers and program names are listed so that
you can ATTACH to the jobs, log them out, and type the
command again, if you wish the command to succeed.
?p NXM ERRS FROM n TO m
When a SET MEMORY ON-LINE command is executed, the system
references the memory in the range specified in the command
to ensure that it actually exists and is on-line. Should
any nonexistent memory be encountered during this procedure,
the range of nonexistent locations (n,m) is reported on the
OPR terminal along with the number of errors (p), and the
memory in that range is treated as off-line.
Example
You are instructed by the systems programmer to set 512K
off-line.
.SET MEMORY OFF-LINE FROM 512K TO 1024K<RET>
.
4-25
TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS
4.16 SET NOMESSAGE
Function
The SET NOMESSAGE command suppresses messages from disk and tape
devices, and from DL10-based PDP-11 nodes. Normally, when one of
these devices goes off-line unexpectedly, a message is sent to
the operator's console once-a-minute. The SET NOMESSAGE command
controls those types of messages. One of the messages you might
see is:
UNIT device-name WENT OFF-LINE
PLEASE POWER DOWN AND TURN IT ON AGAIN
Format
To suppress tape controller messages, use the following format:
SET NOMESSAGE MTx
Argument
x is the name of the controller that is sending messages.
Format
To suppress messages from disk units, use the following format:
SET NOMESSAGE RPxn
Argument
RPxn is the disk unit, including controller name (x) and
unit number (n).
Format
To suppress messages from a DL10-based PDP-11 node, use the
format:
SET NOMESSAGE PDP-11 n
Argument
n is the number of the node that is off-line.
4-26
TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS
Format
The SET NOMESSAGE command also controls the messages from
specific types of disk errors. RIB error messages are counted
from system startup, and messages from RIB errors may be
suppressed by setting the RIB error message threshold RIBERN at
system generation, or with the SET NOMESSAGE command. Use the
following format of SET NOMESSAGE to set the message threshold
from RIB errors:
SET NOMESSAGE RIB n
Argument
n is the number of RIB error messages to be suppressed before
beginning to print them on the CTY. The default threshold
is 0 so that all RIB error messages are printed. Note that
the total number of RIB error messages is reset to 0 only
when the system is reloaded.
Format
SET NOMESSAGE suppresses messages reporting non-recoverable
(hard) errors from disk units. You can use the SET NOMESSAGE
command to set the threshold for hard error messages from disk
units with the following command:
SET NOMESSAGE DSKERR n
Argument
n is the number of messages to be suppressed before printing
one message. When the number of hard error messages exceeds
n, a message is printed on the CTY. Note that the counter
of hard error messages is reset to 0 when a message is
printed on the CTY. The system default threshold for hard
disk error messages is 25. Therefore, by default, every
twenty-sixth message is printed on the CTY.
Example
You turn off the once-a-minute message for disk drive RPA2.
.SET NOMESSAGE RPA2<RET>
.
4-27
TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS
4.17 SET OPR
Function
The SET OPR command changes the terminal designated as the OPR
terminal while the system is running.
Format
SET OPR TTYnn:
or
SET OPR CTY
Arguments
TTYnn: specifies the number of the terminal to be
designated as the OPR terminal.
CTY specifies the terminal on the console front
end.
Example
You set terminal 23 to be the OPR terminal.
.SET OPR TTY23:<RET>
.
4-28
TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS
4.18 SET SCHED
Function
The SET SCHED command changes the scheduled use of the system.
Format
SET SCHED nnnn
Argument
nnnn specifies an octal number which is stored in the
right half of the STATES word in COMMON. The
following values for "nnnn" have independent
meanings, and several can be specified
concurrently by adding the values together (see
example).
0 specifies regular timesharing and batch
operations.
1 specifies no further LOGINs allowed except
from the CTY.
2 specifies no further LOGINs from remote
terminals, and do not answer data sets.
4 specifies batch operation only.
10 specifies stand-alone operation only.
200 specifies that unspooling is allowed.
400 specifies no operator coverage.
1000 specifies to inhibit automatic execution of
NETLDR.
Example
You set the system schedule to 15. This allows you to run the
system as stand-alone, batch operations only, and no LOGINs
except from the CTY (a combination of 1, 4, and 10).
.SET SCHED 15<RET>
.
4-29
TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS
4.19 SET TTY
Function
When used with a device argument, the SET TTY command declares to
the scanner service special properties of a terminal line other
than the one on which the command is typed. The device argument
can be used to modify the characteristics of any terminal line on
the system.
Formats
SET TTY TTYn: argument
TTY TTYn: argument
TTYn: specifies the terminal whose line number (n)
is to be controlled. This argument is
optional. If omitted, the command is
identical to the SET TTY command described in
the TOPS-10 Operating System Commands Manual.
Arguments
ALTMODE converts the ALTMODE codes of 175 and 176 to
the standard ASCII ESCape character 033
(initial state if, at monitor generation, the
TTYALT symbol is assigned a non-zero value).
NO ALTMODE restores the individual identity of
the codes 175 and 176.
BLANKS restores multiple carriage return/line feeds
and form feeds (initial state).
NO BLANKS suppresses blank lines (consecutive carriage
return/line feeds after the first) and outputs
form feeds and vertical tabs as two carriage
return/line feeds. This is useful for a video
display terminal in order to increase the
amount of output that fits on the screen.
COPY controls output of ESCape characters to VT5x
NO COPY terminals only.
CRLF restores the free carriage return (initial
state).
4-30
TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS
NO CRLF suppresses the free carriage return normally
output at the end of a line exceeding the
carriage width.
DEFER suppresses terminal echoing until the user
program or monitor asks for the characters.
This means that programs that are doing cursor
control or are handling their own rubouts can
get the screen image correct without doing
their own echoing.
NO DEFER turns off the SET TTY TTYn: DEFER command.
DISPLAY notifies the system that the terminal you are
using is a display terminal.
NO DISPLAY turns off the SET TTY TTYn: DISPLAY command.
ECHO restores the normal echoing of each character
entered. Most terminals for TOPS-10 are used
in full duplex mode which means that the
terminal does not print each character as the
user types it. Instead the monitor echoes
each character typed so that the character is
printed. If a terminal prints C when it is
typed but does not print any of the noncontrol
characters typed by the user, then this
command can be used to establish normal
echoing. (Each installation determines the
initial setting when generating its monitor at
system generation time.)
NO ECHO suppresses monitor echoing of input
characters. Local copy terminals (that is,
terminals which automatically print each
character as the user types it) do not require
monitor echoing because the echoing would
cause each character typed to be printed
twice. This command is used to stop double
printing of each character on a local copy
terminal. (The initial setting is determined
by each installation when constructing its
monitor at system generation time.)
FILL n assigns filler class n to this terminal. Many
different types of terminals are supported by
the TOPS-10 operating system. Some terminals
require one or more filler characters to be
sent following certain control characters such
as line feed (LF) and horizontal tab (HT).
Table 4-1 illustrates the number of fillers
4-31
TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS
sent for each character and filler class. The
filler characters are CR (215 octal for even
parity) for carriage return characters (CR,
215 octal) and DEL (RUBOUT, 377 octal) for all
other character. No fillers are supplied for
image mode output. (The initial setting is
determined by each installation when
constructing its monitor at system generation
time.
NO FILL is equivalent to TTY FILL 0. (The initial
setting is determined by each installation
when constructing its monitor at system
generation time.) Fillers for output and
echoing are determined from Table 4-1.
Table 4-1: Number of Fillers by Character and Filler Class
__________________________________________________________________
Character Octal Number of Fillers for Filler Class
Name
0 1 2 3
__________________________________________________________________
BS 010 0 2 6 6
HT 011 0 1 OR 2 0 1 OR 2 (1)
LF 012 0 2 6 6
VT 013 0 2 6 6
FF 014 0 12 21 21
CR on output 015 0 1 3 3 (2)
FREE CR (3) 0 2 4 4
CRLF on output 015-012 0 3 9 9 (4)
XON 021 1 1 1 1
TAPE 022 1 1 1 1
XOFF 023 1 1 1 1
NTAP 024 1 1 1 1
__________________________________________________________________
(1) 1 if 0-3 spaces to tab stop; 2 if 4-7 spaces to tab stop.
(2) Output only; no fillers on input.
(3) Refer to the SET TTY TTYn CRLF command.
(4) Sum of the fillers output for a CR and LF.
__________________________________________________________________
4-32
TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS
Argument Function
FORM specifies that the terminal has hardware form
(page) and VT (vertical tab) characters. (The
initial setting is determined by each
installation when constructing its monitor at
system generation time.)
NO FORM specifies that the monitor sends eight line
feeds for a form and four line feeds for a VT.
(The initial setting is determined by each
installation when constructing its monitor at
system generation time.)
GAG specifies that messages transmitted by the
SEND command cannot be received at this
terminal unless the job is at monitor level
(initial state).
NO GAG specifies that messages transmitted by the
SEND command can be received at this terminal
even though the job is not at monitor level.
HOLD controls use of scroll key on VT5x terminals
NO HOLD only.
IGNORE allows you to disable a line. The line will
be ignored by the PDP-11.
NO IGNORE turns off the SET TTY TTYn: IGNORE command.
LC suppresses the translation of lowercase
character input to uppercase.
NO LC causes the monitor to translate lowercase
characters to uppercase as they are received.
Frequently, it is convenient to have a
terminal with both uppercase and lowercase to
simulate the behavior of one with uppercase
only. This command causes the monitor to
perform this simulation. The echo sent back
by the monitor always matches the case of the
characters after translation. By looking at
the printout, the user can determine what
translation was performed by the monitor
(initial state).
4-33
TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS
PAGE n gives the user the ability to temporarily
suspend system typeout without losing it. The
XOFF key <CTRL/S> suspends the typeout, and
the XON key <CTRL/Q> restores it for "n"
lines. The XOFF and XON are not echoed and
are not sent to the user's program. This
command is useful for video display terminals
so that the user can read a page of text
before it disappears from the screen. Note
that it preempts the user of <CTRL/S> and
<CTRL/Q> for reading paper tape. (See SET TTY
TAPE.)
NO PAGE disables the typeout control ability of the
XOFF and XON keys. The current interpretation
of these keys depends on the last SET TTY TAPE
command (initial state).
RTCOMP disables the <CTRL/R> (reprint current line
after making corrections) and <CTRL/T> (print
job status without interrupting execution)
features allowing <CTRL/R> and <CTRL/T> to be
passed to the user program.
NO RTCOMP turns on the <CTRL/R> and the <CTRL/T>
feature.
SLAVE specifies that the terminal becomes slaved, so
that no commands can be typed on the terminal.
The terminal can then be ASSIGNed by another
user. You can slave any terminal including
your own. (The initial setting is determined
by each installation when constructing its
monitor at system generation time.)
NO SLAVE specifies that the terminal becomes unslaved
so that commands can now be typed on the
console. If OPR is slaved, you can LOGIN
under [1,2] on another terminal to unslave
OPR. (The initial setting is determined by
each installation when constructing its
monitor at system generation time.
SPEED n sets the speed at which the system sends and
receives characters to n baud. (The user must
adjust the speed at the terminal by setting a
switch.)
SPEED m,n sets the terminal transmitting speed to m baud
and the receiving speed to n baud. (This is
especially useful for display terminals that
allow transmitting and receiving at different
speeds.)
4-34
TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS
TAB specifies that the hardware tab stops are set
every eight columns. (The initial setting is
determined by each installation when
constructing its monitor at system generation
time.)
NO TAB specifies that the monitor simulates tab
output from programs by sending the necessary
number of space characters.
TAPE specifies that the XON key <CTRL/Q> causes the
terminal to read paper tape. The XOFF key
<CTRL/S> causes the terminal to stop reading
paper tape. Rubouts are ignored and free
CRLFs are not sent.
NO TAPE specifies that the XON key <CTRL/Q> and the
XOFF key <CTRL/S> have no special paper tape
function. They can, however, have a page
function. (See SET TTY TTYn: PAGE command.)
TYPE nnnn sets the terminal hardware characteristics.
nnnn is the terminal type. The monitor
command "HELP *" shows a list of the terminal
types supported on your system.
UC is equivalent to SET TTY TTYn: NO LC.
NO UC is equivalent to SET TTY TTYn: LC.
WIDTH n specifies that the carriage width (the point
at which a free carriage return is inserted)
is set to n. The range of n is 17 (two tab
stops) to 200 decimal. The initial state is
72.
Restriction
The SET TTY command requires LOGIN if you are unslaving OPR.
Example
You set a user's terminal for lowercase, a width of 80, and a
speed of 150 input baud rate and 2400 output baud rate.
.SET TTY TTY23: LC WIDTH 80 SPEED 150 2400<RET>
.
4-35
TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS
4.20 SET VMMAX
Function
The SET VMMAX command specifies the maximum amount of virtual
memory available to all users of the system.
After the execution of this command, the new value of VMMAX is
one of the following:
1. The total amount of allocated swapping space, if n is greater
than the total amount allocated.
2. The amount currently in use by all virtual memory users, if n
is less than the total amount in use.
3. The value of n, if neither of the above is true.
Format
SET VMMAX nP
or
SET VMMAX nK
Arguments
nK specifies the number of words of virtual
memory. 1K is equal to 1024 words. If you
omit the K or the P, K is the default.
nP specifies the number of pages of virtual
memory. 1P is equal to 512 words.
Example
You set the virtual memory to five thousand pages (equivalent to
2560 words).
.SET VMMAX 5000P<RET>
.
4-36
TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS
4.21 XCHNGE
Function
The XCHNGE command enables a system with a bad disk unit to
continue without unnecessary user disruption by logically
exchanging disk drives and then having you physically exchange
disk packs.
Format
XCHNGE diskunit1: diskunit2:
Argument
diskunitn: specifies the disk unit you want to exchange
with another disk unit. For example, you
exchange RPA0 for RPA2.
CAUTION
Careless use of this command can
destroy information on disk packs
because the monitor assumes that the
physical disk packs have been switched
by you. For that reason, both disk
drives should be powered down before
issuing the command. One precaution
the monitor does take whenever this
command is issued is to automatically
place both disk drives off-line. It
is up to you to then switch the disk
packs before placing the units back
on-line.
4-37
TOPS-10 OPERATOR-PRIVILEGED MONITOR COMMANDS
Restrictions
Diskunit1 and diskunit2 must be on the same controller, and must
be of the same type.
Associated messages are:
?XCHNGE DISKUNIT1?
The disk unit specified does not exist.
?XCHNGE DISKUNIT1 DISKUNIT2?
One of the following conditions exists:
o The two disk drives are on different controllers
o The second disk unit specified does not exist
o The disk unit contains non-removable media
Example
You exchange the disk pack on RPA1: with the disk pack on RPA3:.
.XCHNGE RPA1: RPA3: /CM<RET>
.
4-38
CHAPTER 5
OPSER COMMAND LANGUAGE
5.1 INTRODUCTION TO OPSER
The TOPS-10 operating system considers all jobs to be timesharing
jobs; thus, each job must be associated with a timesharing terminal
(TTY). In some situations, however, it is inconvenient to require a
timesharing terminal to be associated with every job on the system
(for example, where many jobs are needed for a single application).
OPSER provides a method whereby a single job running from a single
timesharing terminal can control many subjobs simultaneously. To do
this, OPSER implements a "device" called a pseudo-terminal (PTY). A
PTY is a software simulation of a terminal. The controlling program,
OPSER, can send information to a PTY and receive information from a
PTY.
OPSER starts running subjobs by means of pseudo-terminals and controls
each subjob by sending appropriate information (for example, the
commands or data you give it) over the PTY controlling the subjob.
You can run as many subjobs as there are PTYs on the system, up to a
maximum of 14. Through OPSER you can control many jobs from one
terminal.
5.2 STARTING OPSER
OPSER normally starts when the system is brought up. At this time
OPSER reads and processes the file SYS:OPR.ATO (an automatic startup
file). This file contains the OPSER commands that initiate the
running of system software programs such as input and output spoolers,
components of the batch processing system, and device-servicing
programs (such as MOUNT).
If OPSER has not been started automatically, you can start it by
typing the following command:
.R OPSER<RET>
*
5-1
OPSER COMMAND LANGUAGE
When OPSER displays an asterisk (*), type the following command:
*:AUTO SYS:OPR.ATO<RET>
When OPSER finishes processing the OPR.ATO file, it displays an
asterisk or an exclamation point (!). When OPSER displays an asterisk
or exclamation point, you can enter any of the OPSER commands
described in this chapter.
5.2.1 Commands to the OPSER Program
You must precede each OPSER command by a colon (:), and you must type
enough letters to make the command unique. The :WHAT command is
unique at one character. Therefore, :W is interpreted as :WHAT.
OPSER prompts you with either an asterisk (*) or an exclamation point
(!) when it is ready to receive your commands. An asterisk indicates
that no subjobs are active or a subjob is waiting for some action on
your part. An exclamation point means that at least one subjob is
currently active but you can still communicate with other subjobs.
There are four methods of specifying subjobs in an OPSER command
string.
1. Type the subjob number (or numbers).
2. Type the mnemonic you assigned to the job with the :DEFINE
command.
3. Use the word ALL, which indicates to OPSER that you want the
command to apply to all active subjobs.
4. Leave the subjob specification out entirely, in which case
OPSER assumes you intend the command to apply to the last
subjob you referenced.
If the previous command referenced a list of subjobs, the last one
referenced is the default for any subsequent command. For example, in
the following sequence:
:WHAT A, B, C<RET>
:STOP<RET>
C is the subjob implicitly referred to in the :STOP command.
5-2
OPSER COMMAND LANGUAGE
If A, B, and C were the only active subjobs, and the following
commands were typed:
:WHAT ALL<RET>
:STOP<RET>
C would again be the implicit argument of the :STOP command.
5.2.2 Commands Directly to Subjobs
When you give commands to a subjob, you must indicate for which subjob
(or subjobs) the command is intended. Do this by preceding the
command with the subjob number (or the name assigned by means of the
:DEFINE command) and a hyphen. If you do not specify the subjob
number or name in the command, the command defaults to the last
specified subjob. For example, to stop subjob 3 (defined as LP1) you
could type:
!3-STOP ;using the subjob number
or
!LP1-STOP ;using the subjob name
or
!:STOP ;if LP1 was the last specified subjob
There is a method available in OPSER for sending the same command to
all the subjobs at once. For example, if you want to know the status
within each of the subjobs, instead of typing WHAT to each subjob, you
can do it with a single command. You simply type:
:WHAT ALL<RET>
and OPSER sends the WHAT command to each subjob.
Whenever you enter a command to a subjob, OPSER will timestamp and
identify the entry as follows:
!hh:mm (xxx)
where xxx is the subjob number or name used in the preceding command
line. For example, the following is representative of your CTY
output.
!S-R SPRINT (operator command)
!13:20(S) (OPSER timestamp)
/ (SPRINT prompt)
5-3
OPSER COMMAND LANGUAGE
Sample CTY output included in this chapter usually omits timestamp
entries in the interest of conserving space and reducing clutter.
Actual OPSER output will be timestamped.
Consider the following sequence of commands:
STEP EXPLANATION
.R OPSER<RET> Run the OPSER program.
*:SLOG 2,167<RET> Log in a subjob under [2,167].
!:DEF FIL=<RET> Associate subjob n with the name FIL.
!:WHAT FIL<RET> Print out the status of FIL.
!FIL-R PIP<RET> Tell FIL to run PIP.
*FILC.EXT=FILA.EXT,FILB.EXT<RET>
Use PIP to create one file from data in
two other files.
!:STOP FIL<RET> Return FIL to monitor mode.
!:KJOB FIL<RET> Log out FIL.
!:EXIT<RET> Cause OPSER to exit to the monitor.
The example above shows how to log in a subjob, give it a name, run a
system program, and log out the subjob. Once the concept of subjobs
is understood, it is simple to give system commands and program
commands to a subjob. The entire range of monitor and program
commands can be sent to a subjob as long as the command is preceded by
a subjob name or number followed by a hyphen. This becomes very
important in explaining the service programs which are run under
OPSER.
To <CTRL/C> a subjob, a <CTRL/A> must be used, since a <CTRL/C> under
OPSER is equivalent to :EXIT. For example, to <CTRL/C> subjob FIL
which is running PIP, the command is:
!FIL-A<RET>
!
<CTRL/A>
Whatever was being done under PIP would be allowed to finish, and the
subjob FIL would be put at monitor level.
5-4
OPSER COMMAND LANGUAGE
A useful feature of OPSER is the ability to automatically execute a
predefined set of commands contained in a disk file. This is known as
the AUTO feature of OPSER. For example, consider the following
sequence of commands:
:SLOG 2,167<RET>
:DEF FIL=<RET>
:WHAT FIL<RET>
FIL-R PIP<RET>
FILC.EXT=FILA.EXT,FILB.EXT<RET>
:STOP FIL<RET>
:KJOB FIL<RET>
If the above commands were placed in a file named FIL.ATO, you could
accomplish exactly what was done manually in the example above by
entering the single OPSER command:
:AUTO FIL<RET>
Commands included in a file named OPR.ATO are automatically executed
whenever the system is loaded.
OPSER is used to control a large part of system operation. It is
important that you become proficient in its use.
5.3 OPSER COMMANDS
Some OPSER commands are available to all users while others are
available only to those with OPERATOR privileges.
5.3.1 OPSER Commands for the Operator
OPSER commands that are available to you at the operator's console are
the following:
:JCONT n Continues job n that was waiting for operator
action.
5-5
OPSER COMMAND LANGUAGE
:KSYS hh:mm Stops timesharing at the time specified by
:KSYS +hh:mm hh:mm. This must be at least five minutes
:KSYS later than the current time. If +hh:mm is
used, it means the number of hours and/or
minutes from the current time and must be at
least five minutes. All users logging in
receive a message stating the time at which
timesharing will end. Logged-in users
receive similar messages when the :KSYS
command is given, one hour before timesharing
ends, then at 30, 15, 8, 4, 2, and 1 minutes
before timesharing is scheduled to stop. The
messages are of the form: TIMESHARING ENDS
IN n MIN. :KSYS works only for a [1,2] job
running at the OPR terminal.
Note that :KSYS without an argument undoes
the effect of :KSYS hh:mm or :KSYS +hh:mm.
The colon in the time specification is
optional; both hh:mm and hhmm are valid.
:RESTRICT dev:,... restricts the specified devices to the
operator's use. The operator can assign the
devices to a user, but the user cannot
reassign them to anyone but the operator.
:SET BATMAX n sets the maximum number (n) of batch jobs
that can run simultaneously. The range of n
is 0 through 14 inclusive.
:SET BATMIN n sets the minimum number (n) of batch jobs
that can run simultaneously. The range of n
is 0 through 14 inclusive.
:SET LOGMAX n sets the maximum number (n) of jobs that can
run on the system.
:SET RUN CPUn allows the operator of a multiprocessor
:SET RUN NO CPUn system to turn processors on- and off-line.
:SET RUN ONLY CPUn The n is the CPU number (0 or 1). The
:SET RUN ALL command :SET RUN adds the named processor to
the system pool of running CPUs. The :SET
RUN NO command removes the named CPU from the
system pool. The :SET RUN ONLY command
allows only the named CPU to run. The :SET
RUN ALL command puts all the CPUs available
into the system pool.
5-6
OPSER COMMAND LANGUAGE
:SET argument simulates the monitor command .SET argument,
where argument is one of the following:
BREAK, CORMAX, CORMIN, DATE, DAYTIME, MEMORY,
NOMESSAGE, OPR, SCHED, TTY, or VMMAX.
:UNRESTRICT dev: Returns to the free user resource pool a
device that has been restricted. :UNRESTRICT
is the complement of :RESTRICT.
5.3.2 OPSER Commands for All Users
The following OPSER commands are available to all users of the system:
:AUTO filespec processes the commands contained in the
specified file immediately.
:AUTO /hhmm filespec
processes the specified file at the next
occurrence of hhmm today. If it is past hhmm
today, the file will be processed
immediately.
:AUTO /<hhmm filespec
processes the specified file at the next
occurrence of hhmm today. If it is past hhmm
today, the file will not be processed.
:AUTO />hhmm filespec
processes the specified file at the next
occurrence of hhmm. If the current time is
past hhmm, the file will be processed at hhmm
tomorrow.
5-7
OPSER COMMAND LANGUAGE
:AUTO /+ hhmm filespec
processes the file hh hours and mm minutes
later.
NOTE
In the above commands, "filespec" stands for
file specification and consists of a device,
file name, file extension, and a directory
name in the form:
dev:file.ext[PPN]
where:
dev: is any valid input device name.
The default is DSK:.
file stands for any 1- to 6-character
file name. There is no default.
You must supply a file name.
.ext is any 1- to 3-character file
name extension. The default is
.ATO.
[PPN] is the directory area that
contains the file. The default
is the directory indicated by the
project-programmer number [PPN]
you used to log in.
:CLOSE closes the disk log file without opening a
new one. (The disk log file is a transaction
file where OPSER logs its activities.)
:CONTINUE continues processing the AUTO file after
being interrupted by a <CTRL/C>. This allows
the operator to gain control of a subjob
during AUTO file processing.
:CURRENT types the name of the current subjob if one
has been defined; if a current subjob has not
been defined, it types the number of the
current subjob (the last one typed in).
5-8
OPSER COMMAND LANGUAGE
:DAYTIME types the current date and time.
:DEFINE xxx=n gives subjob n the name xxx, which may be
from one to six characters long. In general,
short names are recommended. The subjob
number may be omitted from the command
string, in which case OPSER assumes the last
subjob you referenced.
RESTRICTIONS
The first character of the name must be
alphabetic and the second through sixth (if
any) must be alphanumeric. The subjob name
"B" is reserved as the mnemonic for BATCON
and should not be assigned to any other
subjob.
:DEVICE dev:log:n causes OPSER to exit to the monitor, where
you can ASSIGN the device (dev:) on subjob
(n) and also associate a logical name (log)
with that device. The logical name is
optional, but if you omit it, you must tell
OPSER. You do this by typing a colon (:)
where the logical name would have appeared,
for example, :DEVICE MTB: :4. If you issue a
.REENTER command before returning to OPSER,
you will abort the .ASSIGN command. When you
are ready to return to OPSER, type :CONT.
:ERROR n,m,... silences all output except error messages
from subjobs n,m, and so on. The :REVIVE
command will resume reporting all messages.
When OPSER is first started, :REVIVE is in
effect.
:EXIT or <CTRL/C> exits to the monitor if no subjobs are
active.
:FREE types the number of the first unused subjob.
:HELP types a text briefly explaining the commands
and their formats.
:KILL n,m,... see :KJOB.
:KJOB n,m,... logs out the specified subjobs n, m, and so
on, saving all their files. Also, the /Z
switch is passed to the KJOB program in order
to suppress the normal queuing done at
log-out time.
5-9
OPSER COMMAND LANGUAGE
:LOGIN PPN logs in a new subjob under project programmer
number PPN. If PPN is not given, OPSER's
project-programmer number is assumed.
:MONITOR exits to the monitor even if subjobs are
active.
:MSGLVL n determines whether or not the job status
(JOBSTS) bits appear in the response to the
:WHAT command. If n equals 0, the job status
bits are included in the :WHAT output. If n
equals 1 (default), the :WHAT output does not
include these bits. The actual letters typed
out represent the following:
L for logged in
M for monitor mode
I for input wait
O for output wait
A for JACCT
:QUEUE line initiates the first free subjob and sends the
line as a QUEUE command to the monitor.
:RESOURCES lists the available system resources.
:REVIVE n,m,... clears the effects of the :SILENCE,
:TSILENCE, and :ERROR commands for subjobs n,
m, and so on, and causes normal echoing or
output from them. When OPSER is first
started, the :REVIVE command is in effect.
:SCHED types out the schedule bits as set by the
operator. The bits are:
000000 Regular timesharing
000001 No further LOGINs except from CTY
000002 No further LOGINs from remote
terminals, and no answering of data
sets
000004 Batch jobs only
000200 Unspooled jobs allowed
000400 No operator coverage
:SEND line simulates the monitor SEND command. Refer to
the TOPS-10 Operating System Commands Manual
for more information.
:SILENCE n,m,... suppresses all terminal and transaction log
output from subjobs n, m, and so on.
5-10
OPSER COMMAND LANGUAGE
:SLOGIN p,pn same as :LOGIN, but also silences all
terminal output until the job is logged in.
:STOP n,m,... puts the subjobs n, m, and so on into monitor
mode.
:SYSTAT xxx runs SYSTAT with the optional arguments xxx
under the first free subjob. For arguments,
see the TOPS-10 Operating System Commands
Manual.
:TIME n types out the total running time for job n
since the last :TIME n command, followed by
the integrated product of running time and
core size.
:TLOG dev:file.ext[PPN]
closes the current OPSER transaction log, if
any, and opens a new log file. If no file is
designated, the default is DSK:OPSER.LOG.
:TSILENCE n,m,... suppresses all terminal output from subjobs
n, m, and so on, but continues output to the
transaction log.
:TTYTST types out a test pattern consisting of the
ASCII characters corresponding to octal 40
through 174 inclusive.
:WHAT n,m,... types the status of the specified subjob(s).
This typeout includes a SYSTAT of each job
with the current time, the time of the last
input and the last output, a linear listing
of the JOBSTS bits (if MSGLVL is set to 0),
and the time of the next timed AUTO file.
:WHERE devn: types the physical location node/station
number of the device dev in subjob n.
5-11
OPSER COMMAND LANGUAGE
5.4 OPSER OPERATOR MESSAGES
The following messages from OPSER can appear on your operator
terminal.
?OPRATE Auto file read error
OPSER encountered a read error while it was trying to process the
auto file.
?OPRANI Device cannot do input
Input cannot be performed on the specified device, either because
it is not a valid device name, or because it is a device that can
only do output.
?OPRBFS Bad file spec
There is a syntax error in the file specification.
?OPRBTS Bad time specified
There is a syntax error in the time specification. See Section
5.2.1 for information about the format of the OPSER commands.
?OPRCKJ Cannot be KJOB'ed
OPSER is unable to log the job out. One cause of this condition
is a job being over quota.
?OPRCMM Cannot be put in monitor mode
The operator attempted to return to the monitor (:EXIT or
<CTRL/C> but was unable to do so even after several tries. This
condition indicates a system or a program problem.
?OPRCNU Command not unique
The operator has entered an abbreviation that does not specify a
unique command.
5-12
OPSER COMMAND LANGUAGE
?OPRCUA Cannot use all
The operator typed a command with "ALL" as the argument. Certain
commands do not accept "ALL" as an argument (for example,
:DEFINE). Refer to Section 5.2.1 for information about the OPSER
operator commands.
?OPRDCO Device cannot do output
The device specified in the :TLOG command is not an output
device.
%OPRDNR DAEMON not running
The DAEMON program has not been initialized.
?OPRDUE DAEMON UUO error
An error occurred when OPSER called DAEMON to do accounting.
Consult the system administrator.
%OPRFMM :KSYS has a minimum of 5 min.
The operator specified an argument that was too small for the
:KSYS command. The value of the "+hh:mm" form of the command
must be +00:05 or greater. The value of hh:mm form of the
command must be at least five minutes later than current time.
See Section 5.3.1 for details about the format of this command.
?OPRJNA No job number assigned
This message generally occurs in response to the :WHAT command.
It happens in cases where the monitor does not know about the
subjob specified in the command.
?OPRJRO Job(s) running on n,m,...
Type ":Kill all" to kill the subjobs
The operator tried to :EXIT or <CTRL/C> from OPSER from subjobs
n,m, and so on were active. The subjos must be killed first.
?OPRLEF Enter failure code on log file
An enter failure occurred when OPSER tried to open the
transaction log file (:TLOG).
5-13
OPSER COMMAND LANGUAGE
?OPRNAS No active subjobs
The operator issued a command to a subjob but no subjobs were
running.
?OPRNFP No free PTY's
There are no more pseudo-terminals (PTYs) available under which
to run subjobs.
?OPRNFS No free subjobs
This message occurs in response to either the :FREE command or a
command that uses a free subjob (such as :QUEUE). It happens
when there are no free subjobs available.
?OPRNSM No such mnemonic
The name specified in the command is not associated with any of
the subjobs. This is either because it was typed incorrectly or
because the name had not previously been associated with a subjob
by means of the :DEFINE command.
[OPRPAF Processing auto command file]
OPSER is currently processing the auto file.
?OPRSJW Is stuck with JACCT on
The operator tried to return to the monitor (:EXIT or <CTRL/C>)
but was unable to do so, even after several tries. This
condition indicates a system or program problem.
?OPRSNA Subjob n is not active
A command was given to subjob n and that subjob is not active.
%OPRSPR superseding previous :AUTO request
The operator issued another :AUTO command. This new command
supersedes the one previously issued.
5-14
APPENDIX A
OPR ERROR MESSAGES
This appendix lists error messages you may encounter while using OPR,
as well as the reason for the error and recovery procedures.
ERROR: ? Ambiguous
Reason: You issued an OPR command, but did not complete it.
For example, you may have left out the necessary
keyword or switch that would make the command execute
properly.
Recovery: Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command and then specify
the necessary keyword or switch.
ERROR: ? Ambiguous switch or keyword
Reason: Same as above.
Recovery: Same as above.
ERROR: ? CONFIRMATION Required
Reason: You gave a command but the command syntax is not valid.
Recovery: Check the command to see if you have provided all
necessary keywords, arguments, and/or switches. Check
that the hardware is available or that the device is
ready for use. Then give the command again. (See
Chapter 2 for the commands correct keywords, arguments
and switches.)
A-1
OPR ERROR MESSAGES
ERROR: ? Device Name name: Does Not Exist
Reason: You specified a device name (name:) in an OPR command
that is currently not recognized by the system. Such
devices are tape drives or disk drives.
Recovery: Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command and specify a
device name that the system acknowledges. Give the
SHOW STATUS command to find those devices that the
system recognizes.
ERROR: ? Does not match switch or keyword
Reason: You specified a switch or keyword for an OPR command
that can not take the switch or keyword specified.
Recovery: Type the command again and then specify a valid switch
or keyword for that command.
ERROR: ? Filename was not specified
Reason: You specified an OPR command that takes a file
specification as a keyword or value to a switch, but
did not specify the file name.
Recovery: Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command and then specify
the file name.
ERROR: ? File not found
Reason: You specified an OPR command that takes a file
specification as a keyword or value to a switch, but
the file was not found.
Recovery: Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command and then specify
the correct file specification.
ERROR: ? First nonspace character is not a digit
Reason: You specified a keyword or switch value that must be
numeric, but the first character is alphabetic or is a
special character.
Recovery: Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command and then specify a
numeric keyword or switch value with any numeric
characters.
A-2
OPR ERROR MESSAGES
ERROR: ? Invalid device terminator
Reason: You specified a device with an illegal character in its
name or you did not include the colon (:) at the end of
the device name.
Recovery: Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command and then specify
the device name with the correct characters and include
the colon (:).
ERROR: ? Invalid HELP command specified
Reason: You specified an invalid OPR command as a keyword to
the HELP command.
Recovery: Give the HELP HELP command to get a list of valid
keywords (OPR commands) to the HELP command.
ERROR: ? Invalid guide word
Reason: You specified a guide word that does not pertain to the
OPR command that you specified, you misspelled the
guide word, or you used recognition and then typed
<CTRL/H> before you pressed <RET>.
Recovery: Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command. If you must have
guide words with the OPR command, use recognition with
the ESCape key.
ERROR: ? Invalid node name
Reason: You specified a node name or number to the /NODE switch
for a node that has not been enabled, does not exist,
or has been misspelled.
Recovery: Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command and then specify
the correct node name or number to the /NODE switch.
You might have to ENABLE the node before you reissue
the command.
A-3
OPR ERROR MESSAGES
ERROR: ? Invalid Node Terminator
Reason: You specified a node name or number in an OPR command,
but did not specify the double colon (::) at the end of
the name.
Recovery: Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command and include the
two colons. Some OPR commands will provide the two
colons after the name or number, if you press the
ESCape key after typing the node name.
ERROR: ? Invalid OPR command specified
Reason: You specified an invalid OPR command.
Recovery: Type a question mark to the OPR prompt to get a list of
valid OPR commands.
ERROR: ? Invalid token found
Reason: You specified an OPR command, such as HOLD or RELEASE,
but did not give one of the necessary arguments. The
necessary arguments are the request-id-number, the
project-programmer number, or an asterisk.
Recovery: Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command and include one of
the required arguments to the command.
ERROR: ? Invalid wildcard designator
Reason: You specified a wildcard character (* or %) within a
file specification for a keyword or switch value.
Recovery: Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command and then specify
the file specification without any wildcard characters.
OPR/ORION does not accept wildcard characters within a
file specification.
ERROR: ? Negative number improper
Reason: You specified a negative number for a device or stream
number. OPR does not accept negative numbers.
Recovery: Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command and then specify a
positive integer as a device or stream number.
A-4
OPR ERROR MESSAGES
ERROR: ? No such filename
Reason: You specified a file name as a keyword or switch value,
but the file name does not exist as you specified it.
Recovery: Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command and then specify
the correct file name as the keyword or switch value.
ERROR: ? No such file type
Reason: You specified a file type as a keyword or switch value,
but the file type does not exist as you specified it.
Recovery: Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command and then specify
the correct file type as the keyword or switch value.
ERROR: ? Not a quoted string - does not begin with double
quote
Reason: You specified a message text, but did not include it
within double quotes ("message text").
Recovery: Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command and then specify
the message text within the required double quotes.
ERROR: ? Not confirmed
Reason: You specified too many keywords or switches to an OPR
command. OPR expected a carriage return after one of
the keywords or switches specified.
Recovery: Type <CTRL/H>; OPR retypes the command up to the point
where carriage return is expected. Then press <RET>.
ERROR: ? Only one file allowed
Reason: You specified the BACKSPACE or FORWARDSPACE command
with the /FILE switch and a numeric value greater
than 1.
Recovery: Type <CTRL/H>; OPR retypes the command up to the point
where you entered the number of files. You can then
enter 1 or press <RET> . The /FILE switch defaults
to 1.
A-5
OPR ERROR MESSAGES
ERROR: ? Priority not in range
Reason: You specified a priority number in the SET JOB-PRIORITY
command that is not in the range from 1 to 63.
Recovery: Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command and then specify a
priority number from 0 to 63.
ERROR: ? Too many characters in node name
Reason: You specified too many characters in a name
specification to the /NODE switch. The /NODE name can
have only from one to six alphanumeric characters.
Recovery: Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command and then specify
the correct node name for the /NODE switch. The name
must be six characters or less.
Recovery: Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command and then supply
the two colons at the end of the node name/number.
ERROR: ? Value missing in date/time
Reason: You specified an OPR command that requires an argument
of date and/or time, such as the SET USAGE command.
Recovery: Type <CTRL/H>, or retype the command and supply the
date and/or time as an argument. To check whether the
date and/or time is needed give the "?" command to list
your options.
A-6
OPR ERROR MESSAGES
A-7
A-8
INDEX
-A- CONFIG
ADD command, 3-21
ABORT command, 2-2 ALLOCATE DUMP-BUFFER command,
ALIGN command, 2-5 3-24
Aligning printer forms, 2-5 AUTO-C0NFIGURE command, 3-25
Allowing access to structures, LOAD command, 3-26
2-167 REMOVE command, 3-28
Altering memory configuration, RETURN command, 3-30
4-24 SET command, 3-31
ATTACH CPU command, 4-2 SHOW command, 3-36
ATTACH DEVICE command, 4-3 SHUTDOWN command, 3-38
ATTACH disk-unit command, 4-5 SNAPSHOT command, 3-39
ATTACH JOB command, 4-7 Connecting to specified jobs, 4-7
Attaching devices, 4-3 CONTINUE command, 2-17
Attaching disk, 4-5 Controlling batch output, 2-170
Automatic OPR, 2-163 CTRL/H, 1-6
-B-
BACKSPACE command, 2-8
-D-
-C- Debugging system program, 4-16
DEFINE FILE-ACCESS command, 2-20
Canceling requests, 2-11 DEFINE NETWORK-QUEUE command,
CATALOG 2-21
DELETE command, 3-4 DEFINE NODE command, 2-22
DISABLE command, 3-5 Defining
ENABLE command, 3-6 FAL accessibility, 2-20
HELP command, 3-7 nodes, 2-22
INSERT command, 3-9 remote printers, 2-21
LIST command, 3-13 DETACH DEVICE command, 4-9
MODIFY command, 3-14 DETACH disk-unit command, 4-11
RETURN command, 3-17 Detaching devices, 4-9
SHOW command, 3-18 DISABLE command, 2-26
Changing CORMAX, 4-18 Dismounting structures, 2-32
Changing CORMIN, 4-19 Displaying
Changing OPR terminal, 4-28 batch control files, 2-128
Changing requests, 2-56 date and time, 2-150
Changing system date, 4-22 device information, 2-143
Changing system lists, 2-56 mountable device allocations,
Changing system parameters, 4-1 2-126
Changing system schedule, 4-29 node routing tables, 2-142
Changing system time, 4-23 operators, 2-133
Closing ORION log file, 2-15 outstanding messages, 2-130
Commands system information, 2-125,
reprinting faulty, 1-6 2-143
to subjobs, 5-3 system lists, 2-148
Index-1
-E- Non-privileged OPSER commands,
5-7
Enabling system features, 2-35 NQC streams, 1-10
Entering command subsets, 2-41
Exchanging disk packs, 4-37 -O-
Executing OPR, 2-163
EXIT command, 2-43 Obtaining subjob status, 5-3
Operator privileges, 1-2
-F- Operator-privileged commands, 4-1
OPR, 1-2
Forward spacing pages, 2-44 syntax errors, 1-13
OPR command description headings,
-H- 2-1
OPR help, 2-47
HELP, 1-3, 1-4, 1-7 OPR.ATO file, 5-1
HELP command, 2-47 OPSER
HOLD command, 2-49 command, 5-6
Holding requests in queue, 2-49 command format, 5-2
controlling program, 5-1
-I- messages, 5-12
prompts, 5-2
Identifying tape mounts, 2-51 restrictions, 5-9
INITIA command, 4-13 OPSER AUTO
feature, 5-4
-L- OPSER subjobs, 5-1
ORION, 1-2
LCP ORION to OPR messages, 1-11
CLEAR command, 3-45
RETURN command, 3-48 -P-
SET command, 3-49
SHOW command, 3-52 Privileged OPSER commands, 5-5
START command, 3-56 PUSH command, 2-64
STOP command, 3-57
ZERO COUNTERS command, 3-58 -Q-
Leaving OPR command level, 2-43
LOCK command, 2-53 QUOTA
Logging in subjobs, 5-4 ADD command, 3-62
DELETE command, 3-64
-M- HELP command, 3-65
LIST command, 3-66
MODIFY command, 2-56 MODIFYcommand, 3-68
Modifying terminal RETURN command, 3-70
characteristics, 4-30 SHOW command, 3-71
MOUNT command, 2-60
Mounting structures, 2-60 -R-
Moving to another context, 2-64
Multiple operators, 1-3 Recognizing labeled volumes, 2-65
Releasing requests in queue, 2-67
Remote node specification, 1-3
-N- Removing
disks, 4-11
NEXT command, 2-62 structures, 2-53
Index-2
Reporting to error file, 2-69 Setting (Cont.)
Reprinting pages, 2-8 plotter parameters, 2-103
Rescheduling requests, 2-71 printer parameters, 2-106
Responding to messages, 2-74 tape-drive parameters, 2-114
Restricting the use of a device, usage accounting, 2-122
2-76 virtual memory limits, 4-36
Returning a device to general use, SHOW ALLOCATION command, 2-126
2-169 SHOW command, 2-125
Routing output requests, 2-77 SHOW CONTROL-FILE command, 2-128
SHOW MESSAGES command, 2-130
-S- SHOW NETWORK-QUEUE-NAMES command,
2-132
SCHED bits, 4-29 SHOW OPERATORS command, 2-133
SEND command, 4-14 SHOW PARAMETERS command, 2-135
Sending messages, 2-81, 4-14 SHOW QUEUES command, 2-138
SET BATCH-STREAM command, 2-84 SHOW ROUTE-TABLE command, 2-142
SET BREAK command, 4-16 SHOW STATUS command, 2-143
SET CARD-PUNCH command, 2-88 SHOW SYSTEM command, 2-148
SET command, 2-83 SHOW TIME command, 2-150
SET CORMAX command, 4-18 SHUTDOWN command, 2-151
SET CORMIN command, 4-19 Specifying
SET CPU command, 4-20 next request, 2-62
SET DATE command, 4-22 OPSER subjobs, 5-2
SET DAYTIME command, 4-23 START command, 2-154
SET FAL-STREAM command, 2-91 Starting
SET JOB command, 2-92 OPSER, 5-1
SET KSYS command, 2-94 programs automatically, 5-1
SET MEMORY command, 4-24 STOP command, 2-157
SET NODE command, 2-97 Stopping subjobs, 5-4
SET NOMESSAGE command, 4-26 SUPPRESS command, 2-161
SET NQC-STREAM command, 2-99 Suppressing device messages, 4-26
SET OPR command, 4-28 Suppressing printer form-feeds,
SET PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH command, 2-161
2-100 SUSPEND command, 3-40
SET PLOTTER command, 2-103
SET PRINTER command, 2-106 -T-
SET SCHED command, 4-29
SET SYSTEM command, 2-111 TAKE command, 2-163
SET TAPE-DRIVE command, 2-114 Time stamp, 1-11
SET TERMINAL TYPE command, 2-120 TTYs, 5-1
SET TTY command, 4-30
SET TTY restriction, 4-35
SET USAGE command, 2-122 -U-
SET VMMAX command, 4-36
Setting UNLOCK command, 2-167
batch stream parameters, 2-84 UNRESTRICT command, 2-169
card punch parameters, 2-88
job characteristics, 2-92
node parameters, 2-97 -W-
OPR terminal parameters, 2-120
paper-tape-punch parameters, WAIT command, 2-170
2-100 :WHAT ALL command, 5-3
Index-3
-X-
XCHNGE command, 4-37
Index-4